Apol Lo

APOLLO
0051
Service Manual
Version 17 July 2006 (Rev. 4)
APOLLO
0051
Service Manual
This Manual belongs to Apollo equipment serial No. Version 17 July 2006 (Rev. 4)
SERVICE MANUAL Revision history
Revision history
Rev. 0 1 Date 14.01.05 29.03.05 Page/s 6-2, 6-14, 6-44, 17-5, from 22-129 to 22-145 Modification description Document approval. A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout and wiring diagram update. Parameter 74 update in Inverter setting. Description of basement grubs regulation.
(Ref. RDM 6040, RDM 6078, RDM 6092)
27.04.05
4-6, 4-11, 6-44, 7-1, 8-1, 8-3, 9-2, 11-10, 11-13, 11-16, 11-25, 11-26, 13-6, 13-10, da 22-9 a 22-45, 22-49, da 22-69 a 22-77, da 22-81 a 22-95
Change of min and max height of compressor cone with respect to table top. Release of SW Version 1.03 (correcting some minor bugs and introducing some improvements). Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
(Ref. RDM 6008, RDM 6103, RDM 6104)
14.04.06
All
Release of "All Digital" version. Release of "C-CSA-US" version. Release flat tabletop version. Software parameters updating. Release of SW version 1.05 (HOLD function active message on the display, collimator additional filter function, Table Top double height possibilities from floor). Wiring diagrams and Drawings update. Spare Parts chapter added.
(Ref. RDM 6292, RDM 6340, RDM 6360)
17.07.06
from 4-2 to 4-6, 4-8, 8-1, 11-14, 11-16, 11-21, 11-25, 11-37, 11-42, 14-4, 18-3, 20-3, 22-3, from 22-9 to 22-45, 22-49, from 22-81 to 22-95, 22-129, 22-131, from 22-155 to 22-159, 23-6
Release of SW version 1.06 on cabinet CPU board and SW version 1.04 on console CPU board (4 Tomo speed, SID and Layers displayed in inch, compression force displayed in lbs, 43x35 cassette division 4:1). Additional Collimator Filters board A16 (optional) added. Table Top Control board A17 added.
(Rif. RDM 6414, RDM 6467)
(Rev. 4)
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Revision history
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Contents
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 1.2
1-1
Symbols used in this manual .............................................................. 1-1 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service ................ 1-2
SAFETY ASPECTS
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
2-1
Warnings ............................................................................................. 2-2 Radioprotection warnings .................................................................... 2-5 Environmental risks and disposal........................................................ 2-8 Used symbols ...................................................................................... 2-9
DESCRIPTION
3.1
3.1.1 3.1.2
3-1
ID labels .............................................................................................. 3-1

ID labels "CE" version.......................................................................3-2 ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version ............................................3-3
3.2
Description .......................................................................................... 3-4
TECHNICAL DATA
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
4-1
Technical features ............................................................................... 4-1 Formats division table in centimeters .................................................. 4-8 Formats division table in inches .......................................................... 4-9 Standards and regulations................................................................. 4-10 Dimensions ....................................................................................... 4-11
PRE-INSTALLATION
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
5-1
Space requirements ............................................................................. 5-3 Electrical provisions ............................................................................ 5-6 Adaptation to the mains voltage........................................................... 5-7 Environmental conditions.................................................................... 5-7
INSTALLATION
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
6-1
Base positioning with beam and column.............................................. 6-2 Assembly of the Tube support arm ...................................................... 6-5 Spot Film Device assembly .................................................................. 6-6 Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly ......................... 6-10 Machine cable connection.................................................................. 6-12
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
6.6
Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23

6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 9-12 fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation.................................. 6-24 16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model) ............ 6-26 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation....................................... 6-28 6.6.3.1 9 with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation ................. 6-29 6.6.3.2 12 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-31 6.6.3.3 16 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-33
6.7 6.8 6.9
Installation of the Tube - Collimator group......................................... 6-35 Mounting the covers .......................................................................... 6-39 Tabletop assembly ............................................................................. 6-45
6.9.1 6.9.2 Curved tabletop assembly .............................................................. 6-45 Flat tabletop assembly ................................................................... 6-47
6.10 Final verifications .............................................................................. 6-49
THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE

7.1
7.1.1 7.1.2
7-1
Functioning sequences ........................................................................ 7-3

Powering up and initialisation sequence ........................................... 7-3 Activation sequence for a movement ................................................. 7-4 Generation of a condition alarm ....................................................... 7-6 Generation of a operating alarm ....................................................... 7-6 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit.......................... 7-7
7.2
Fault Conditions .................................................................................. 7-6

7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3
IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

8.1 8.2
8-1
Output signals from the Apollo table.................................................... 8-1 Input signals towards the Apollo table ................................................. 8-3
9 10
CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA
10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4
9-1 10-1
10.1 Potmeter adjustment ......................................................................... 10-4

Cell data and list............................................................................ 10-5 ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102) ...................... 10-8 SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104)................................... 10-9 MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment (cells 105 108)........................................................................... 10-10 10.1.5 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 112) 10-14 10.1.6 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 114) ........................................................................... 10-15 10.1.7 WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 118) ........ 10-16 10.1.8 HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 120)...... 10-17 10.1.9 IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment (cells 121 122) ........................................................................... 10-18 10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 124) ..... 10-19
APOLLO
ii
(Rev. 3)
10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126) ................................. 10-20 10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 128) ............. 10-21 10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment ............... 10-22 10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130) ........ 10-24 10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 132) .......................... 10-25 10.1.15 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133) ................... 10-26
11
ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)

11.1.1 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4
11-1
11.1 Group 200 Installation data ............................................................ 11-3

Function of the parameters of group 200 ........................................ 11-3 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control .......................... 11-17 Motors check data function .......................................................... 11-21 Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback .. 11-24 Equipment mechanical dimensions............................................... 11-27 Data relative to single fault potmeter controls ............................... 11-31 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run .................................. 11-35 11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run.................................... 11-36 11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run ................................... 11-41 Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements ................................ 11-43
11.2 Group 300 PDI controlled motor data............................................ 11-17
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 Dimensions and runs .............................. 11-24
11.3.5
11.4 Position 701 EEprom copy ............................................................ 11-45 11.5 Position 711 Clock settings and reset alarm memory .................... 11-46 11.6 Position 721 Test Spot Film Device and table life .......................... 11-47
11.6.1 11.6.2 Spot Film Device test.................................................................... 11-48 Table test ..................................................................................... 11-50
11.7 Position 731 Remote service function ............................................ 11-52 11.8 Position 751 Alarms memory......................................................... 11-53 11.9 Position 850 Table cycles memory ................................................. 11-61
12 13
SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC FUNCTIONALITY

13.1.1 13.1.2
12-1 13-1
13.1 Collision ............................................................................................ 13-1

Anticollision barrier........................................................................ 13-5 Anti entrapment device................................................................... 13-6
13.2 Compressor ....................................................................................... 13-7 13.3 Collimator.......................................................................................... 13-8 13.4 Table automatic positioning............................................................. 13-11
(Rev. 3)
iii
APOLLO
14
OPERATING MODE
14.1.1 14.1.2 14.2.1 14.2.2
14-1
14.1 Spot Film Device ................................................................................ 14-1

"Standard radiography" performance block diagram........................ 14-2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram ..................................................... 14-3 "Standard tomography" block diagram............................................ 14-5 "Sequential tomography" block diagram.......................................... 14-6
14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4
14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7 14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8

14.4.1 14.5.1 14.5.2 14.6.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram................................................ 14-9 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-11 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-12 "Stepping angio" block diagram .................................................... 14-14
14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10
14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13
15 16
EMERGENCY END RUN HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT

16.1.1 16.1.2
15-1 16-1
16.1 A3 output PCB................................................................................... 16-1

Collimator axle speed adjustment ................................................... 16-1 Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) ......... 16-3
16.2 Compressor PCB................................................................................ 16-4
17
THREE-PHASE INVERTER
17-1
17.1 Inverter input/output functions......................................................... 17-2 17.2 Inverter hardware setting................................................................... 17-3 17.3 Inverter software parameters setting .................................................. 17-3
17.3.1 17.3.2 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali ................. 17-4 Parameters that maintain the default settings................................. 17-6
17.4 Access to parameters for writing ........................................................ 17-7 17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters .................................. 17-8
18 19
FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS
19.1.1 19.1.2 19.1.3 19.2.1
18-1 19-1
19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment ............................................................. 19-1

Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette ...................... 19-2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette ....................... 19-3 Checking the positioning of the shutters......................................... 19-3 Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm ................. 19-4
19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field.............................. 19-4 19.3 Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam .......................................... 19-6 19.4 Collimator adjustment ....................................................................... 19-8
APOLLO
iv
(Rev. 3)
20
DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
20-1
20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses............................................ 20-3 20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor ................................................................................... 20-39
20.2.1 20.2.2 20.2.3 Table............................................................................................ 20-39 Spot Film Device (not available on All Digital version) ................. 20-41 Collimator .................................................................................... 20-44
21
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
21-1
21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out ............................................ 21-2 21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician ... 21-3
22
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS
22-1
22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings ................................................ 22-2
23
SPARE PARTS
23-1
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or translated without the prior written consent of Villa Sistemi Medicali. This manual is the English translation of the Italian original manual version.
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
APOLLO
vi
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Introduction
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with which it is sold, to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and repair operations, commonly carried out by the service engineer, are being performed. The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not affect how it works. The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to perform general X-ray examinations. In particular, because of its connected accessories, the equipment is an optimal solution for examinations where the use of contrast liquids is required. The present manual provides the user with instructions for a safe and efficient use of the equipment. The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures contained in the manual and shall never be used for other purposes than those provided by the manual itself. Apollo is an electromedical equipment and, as such, it can be used solely under the supervision of a physician or of highly qualified personnel with the necessary competence in matter of protection from X-rays. The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements regulating the installation and the functioning of the equipment itself.
1.1
Symbols used in this manual
Indicates a NOTE; please pay particular attention when reading the topics identified by such symbol.
Indicates a WARNING; topics identified by this symbol refer to the patient and/or operator safety aspects.
(Rev. 3)
1-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Introduction
1.2
How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service

For any technical queries please contact the following: Telephone number +39 02 488591 Fax number +39 02 48859222 E-mail: service_support@villasm.com
APOLLO
1-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects
SAFETY ASPECTS
WARNING: All information contained in the present chapter must be carefully read and, where provided, must be applied in order to avoid damage to the equipment or to people. Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary information for an appropriate use and warnings about the dangers associated with X-ray generators. Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for: the use of Apollo equipment different from the one it was originally designed for damages to the equipment, to the operator, to the patient caused by both wrong installation and maintenance not in conformity with the procedures contained in the equipment's user and maintenance manuals, and by incorrect operating techniques mechanical and/or electrical modifications performed during or after installation.
Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide technical assistance for the equipment. Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the electrical cabinet and of the equipment, and access the parts under tension and the moving parts.
(Rev. 3)
2-1
APOLLO
2.1
Warnings
Apollo is suited for use in hospital, therefore the line connection may not be carried out in buildings with domestic-type power supply lines. The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours, anaesthetic mixtures inflammable when in contact with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide. In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion, avoid the infiltration of water of other liquids in the equipment. Before cleaning the equipment, always ensure it is disconnected from the line. All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic microprocessor system. Speeds, positions, starts and stops of these movements are controlled and managed by the equipment's logic. Safety aspects are fundamental in this logic in order to ensure the maximum safety both for the patient and the operator. Nevertheless, the operator MUST ALWAYS PAY CLOSE ATTENTION when a movement is activated. Press the EMERGENCY red buttons located on the control console and on the front side of the equipment in case of danger. These buttons will immediately stop any movement and function. They are a valid instrument for the operator in addition to the intrinsic safety devices of the equipment. Before activating motorised parts, such as the tilting, the tabletop, or the angulation, ensure that the patient is correctly positioned and that their legs and arms are positioned within the shape of the tabletop. If possible, use the support handgrips. During the motorised movements, no objects interfering with the movements should be in proximity of the table. Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room. Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from electromagnetic interference, the equipment must be installed at a certain distance from the electrical energy transformation cabins, from static uninterruptible power supplies, from walkie-talkies and cellular phones. The latter two may only be used at the distances from any element of the equipment reported in the following page.
APOLLO
2-2
(Rev. 3)
R.F. source power 10 mW 100 mW 1W 10 W 100 W
Distance (m) 0.3 1 3 8 30
Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations. Noncompliant instruments, with known scarce immunity to electromagnetic fields, must be installed at a distance of at least 3 mt (9.84 feet) from Apollo and must be powered through a dedicated electric line. Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment:
Electromagnetic emissions Irradiated and conducted emissions CISPR 11 Conformity A class EMC usage environment Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. Apollo generates Radio Frequency energy only for internal functioning. The generated R.F. level does not cause interference with the electrical devices used nearby. Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line.
Group I
Emitted harmonic EN 61000-3-2 Flicker EN 61000-3-3 tension/emission fluctuations EN 60601-1-2 immunity (EN 61000-4-2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /8 /11)
Complying
Complying
Complying
In case of line voltage dips that last longer than what can be sustained by the table electronic control system, the examination in progress may be cancelled. As a consequence, the tabletop and scan movements, as well as the angulation, that may cause damage to the patient become inhibited. The Spot Film Device will be initialised and, in case the cassette is loaded, on the display a warning will ask the operator to remove it before proceeding.
(Rev. 3)
2-3
APOLLO
Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres. Apollo must be powered off when using the electrosurgery cutter or similar devices. Clean and, when necessary, disinfect the parts that may come into contact with the patient by following the procedures provided in the chapter 21.
APOLLO
2-4
(Rev. 3)
2.2
Radioprotection warnings
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary information and warnings about the dangers associated with equipment connected to X-ray generators. The personnel authorised to perform X-ray examinations must observe all regulations regarding the protection against ionizing radiation as reported below: Use dedicated protections (leaded clothing) to protect the patient from X-rays diffused in the areas adjacent to the one to be X-rayed. During X-ray examinations, only the patient is allowed to stay in the room. Medical and paramedic personnel or specifically authorised personnel, if required by the examination, may also be present only if wearing radioprotective clothing. The personnel in the room, during the examination in progress, must stay in the areas indicated in the figures below.
8 7 6 5 4 3 Occupation area (see Figure 2-2)
2 1
Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view
NOTE: The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm (23.6"x23.6"x78.7") occupation area as specified by the applied regulations. In reality, because the I.I. Spot Film Device, tube group has an excursion of 1600 mm (62.9"), the total occupation zone is the one showed in Figure 2-2. Such area takes into account the above-mentioned excursion.
(Rev. 3)
2-5
APOLLO
Occupation area 600x2380 mm (23.6"x93.7") H = 2000 mm (78.7")
Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view
Occupation area (see Figure 2-4)
G F E D C B A
1400 mm (55.1")
Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view
APOLLO
2-6
(Rev. 3)
450 mm (17.7")
Occupation area 600x600 mm (23.6"x23.6") H = 1700 mm (66.9")
Figure 2-4: Vertical table, plan view The maximum values of the radiation diffused in the indicated areas are reported in the following table. Such values have been detected as reported in the safety regulation IEC 601-1-3 and, in particular, for technique factors of 120 kV, 3 mA continuative emission.
Figure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H from the ground 350 mm (13.8") 600 mm (23.6") 1000 mm (39.4") 1200 mm (47.2") 1400 mm (55.1") 1600 mm (63.0") 1800 mm (70.9") 2000 mm (78.7") 350 mm (13.8") 600 mm (23.6") 1000 mm (39.4") 1200 mm (47.2") 1400 mm (55.1") 1600 mm (63.0") 1700 mm (66.9") Dosage 0.06 mGy/h 0.09 mGy/h 2.75 mGy/h 10.5 mGy/h 13.9 mGy/h 13.4 mGy/h 9.6 mGy/h 6.2 mGy/h 1.1 mGy/h 1.9 mGy/h 3.3 mGy/h 4.1 mGy/h 4.4 mGy/h 4.1 mGy/h 3.5 mGy/h
(Rev. 3)
2-7
APOLLO
2.3
Environmental risks and disposal

Some of Apollo components contain material and liquid that, at the end of the equipment life-cycle, must be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed by the Local Health Units. In particular, the equipment contains the following materials and/or components: Reducers: lubricating oil, steel, aluminium Motor: iron, copper, hard plastic material casings Electric cabinet: iron, aluminium, copper, non-biodegradable plastics, vetronite for printed circuits.
APOLLO
2-8
(Rev. 3)
2.4
Used symbols
Symbol
Description Equipment with Type B applied parts Some components contain material and liquid that, at the end of the equipment life-cycle, must be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed by the Local Health Units
N R S T
Alternating current Neutral conductor connection point Three-phase line conductors connection point Ground-fault protection Warning: consult the accompanying documentation Dangerous voltage
(Rev. 3)
2-9
APOLLO
APOLLO
2-10
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Description
3
3.1
DESCRIPTION
ID labels
7 3 4
5 2 1b
(Rev. 3)
3-1
APOLLO
3.1.1
ID labels "CE" version

1a Apollo features label (located on the electric cabinet) 1b Apollo ID label (located on the equipment)
2 Spot Film Device features label
3 Collimator features label
4 "Total Filtration" label
5 "Mechanical moving parts" label
6 "Connect TV chain only" label (inside the electric cabinet)
7 Compression coupling ID label
APOLLO
3-2
(Rev. 3)
3.1.2
ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version

1a Apollo features label (located on the electric cabinet) 1b Apollo ID label (located on the equipment)
1c C-CSA-US certification plate (located on the electric cabinet) 2 Spot Film Device features label 3 Collimator features label
4 "Total Filtration" label
5 "Mechanical moving parts" label
6 "Connect TV chain only" label (inside the electric cabinet) 7 Compression coupling ID label
(Rev. 3)
3-3
APOLLO
3.2
Description
The remote controlled Apollo table is the latest development of remote controlled tables produced by Villa Sistemi Medicali. Apollo table is available in the traditional configuration with a Spot Film Device or in the "All Digital" version, where the Spot Film Device is not present and the table necessarily has to be completed by Digital Image acquisition system. The most recent features applied to this type of table have been incorporated and further improved. In particular: the mechanical construction the cassette's loading/unloading inside the SFD the removal of components' numerous supporting frames, so that the components become "self-supporting". The fundamental functional concepts of the Apollo table are: smallest possible space occupied patient coverage simply through the longitudinal movement of the U arc elevating tabletop with parts rotation system as opposed to sliding system modern, concept winning appearance and design operator's rear access without barriers towards the patient reduced skin-to-film distance or skin-to-I.I. entrance distance in the "All Digital" version carbon fibre or plastic tabletop, with slight curvature or flat surface and integrated accessories holder profiles reduced I.I.-film distance to avoid the parallax correction reduced-dimension console with new functional concepts. Movements and complex functions are controlled by the remote-control console located in the protected X-ray area. The main table movements are replicated on the control panel on the side of the table. All electric and electronic control and logic elements, except for the console, are grouped in a single electric cabinet, which also houses the control modules for the system accessories. The Apollo table, in its traditional configuration, is equipped with a Spot Film Device that permits the use of commonly used cassettes of any type. The format division program is very complete and is described in another paragraph.
APOLLO
3-4
(Rev. 3)
An automatic collimator, controlled by a central logic, sets the limits for the irradiated area. The collimator can be of square-rectangular collimation type or iris type, which has circular field collimation in addition to square rectangular collimation. The "All Digital" version is equipped always with an iris type collimator. To meet the requirements of fluoroscopic modality and image acquisition by means of digital systems, the table is setup to accept image intensifiers from a minimum of 9" (nominal) maximum input field up to a maximum of 16" (nominal). The intensifier is fixed by default by docking it to the Spot Film Device or to an equivalent support in the "All Digital" version, by means of an upper mount anchor plate. As an option, a device called "elevating I.I." is available. This allows to raise the input surface of the I.I. closer to the patient when the cassette is not in the exposure position. In "All Digital" version, the II is located closer to table top, consequently I.I. lift is not available in this configuration. All movement controls are of "dead man" type. Apollo was designed and built in compliance with European directives for obtaining the CE mark as specified in the European Directive 93/42 for Medical Devices, guaranteeing the highest safety for both the operator and the patient. Apollo is a universal table for radiological diagnosis, built to satisfy all needs. It can be employed for the examination of the digestive tract, of the cranium, and of the skeleton, urographies, myelographies, vascular and lungs examinations, bronchography. When fitted with a digital acquisition system, it can also be used for angiographies. The ID code of the equipment varies according to the type of collimator and to the voltage. Apollo is available with both standard and optional accessories. The following table lists all the accessories and divides them as standard, i.e. those usually coming with the equipment, and optional accessories, which must be specifically requested when ordering the equipment.
(Rev. 3)
3-5
APOLLO
Ref. A B C D E F
Description Block patient footrest Headrest Patient support handgrip (N. 2 pieces) Leg support (N. 2 pieces) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder
Type of accessory Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Optional
B C A F E
Figure 3-1: Curved Tabletop accessories
B A
F D E
Figure 3-2: Flat Tabletop accessories All accessories are easily applied as they are mounted directly on the tabletop's profile.
APOLLO
3-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Technical data
4
4.1
TECHNICAL DATA
Technical features
General features Type of equipment Manufacturer Type of equipment and classification in compliance with IEC 60601-1 standard regulation Grade of protection in compliance with IEC 60529 standard regulation Operating mode Use Apollo Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A. 20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy class I with Type B applied parts equipment non protected against penetration of liquids continuous functioning equipment not suitable for use in presence of inflammable anaesthetic mixtures
Electric features Available voltage Frequency Maximum current Fuses on safety isolating transformer Equipment protection Power Line impedance Load voltage drop 3N~ 380-400 Vac 10% 3N~ 415-480 Vac 10% 50-60 Hz 7 A @ 380-400 Vac 10% 6 A @ 415-480 Vac 10% 8 AT @ 380-400 Vac 7 AT @ 415-480 Vac 8 A with magnetothermic 6 kVA < 1.0 @ 380-400 Vac 10% < 1.0 @ 415-480 Vac 10% < 2 % @ 380-400 Vac 10% < 2 % @ 415-480 Vac 10%
(Rev. 3)
4-1
APOLLO
Mechanical features Weight Height vertical table Height horizontal table and max SID Width from the front end of the Spot Film Device to the rear end of the main beam Total width completely retracted Length (horizontal table) Total length with +90 /-90 max SID Setup for I.I. I.I. max size Minimum curved tabletop height from the ground (with Spot Film Device) 895 Kg (1973 lbs) SFD version 830 kg (1830 lbs) All Digital 2500 mm (98.4") 3180 mm (125.2") 1590 mm (62.6") 1920 mm (75.6") 2420 mm (95.3") 4960 mm (195.3") standard fixed mount optional lift 16 inch CENTRE minimum 600 mm (23.6") with 9" I.I. 600 mm (23.6") with 12" I.I. 695 mm (27.4") with 16" I.I. 775 mm (35.0") minimum 618 mm with 9" I.I. 618 mm with 12" I.I. 713 mm with 16" I.I. 793 mm minimum with 9" I.I. with 12" I.I. with 16" I.I. Minimum flat tabletop height from the ground (All Digital version) minimum with 9" I.I. with 12" I.I. with 16" I.I. CENTRE 600 mm (23.6") 600 mm (23.6") 637 mm (25.1") 717 mm (28.2") 618 mm 618 mm 655 mm 735 mm
Minimum flat tabletop height from the ground (with Spot Film Device)
EDGE 668 mm (26.3") 668 mm (26.3") 763 mm (30.0") 843 mm (33.2") (24.3") (24.3") (28.1") (31.2") EDGE 668 mm (26.3") 668 mm (26.3") 705 mm (27.7") 785 mm (30.9") (24.3") (24.3") (25.8") (28.9")
Minimum curved tabletop height from the ground (All Digital version)
Max height tabletop centre from the ground Distance tabletop centre upper side beam Distance upper tabletop edge upper side beam
1400 mm (55.1") curved tabletop 1418 mm (55.8") flat tabletop 185 mm (7.3") curved tabletop 203 mm (7.9") flat tabletop 117 mm (4.6")
APOLLO
4-2
(Rev. 4)
Mechanical features Distance rear side beam internal tabletop edge (with centered tabletop) Distance rear side beam internal tabletop edge (with internal tabletop end run) Electric cabinet containing all electric and electronics controls, including the TV-chain control or the digital module Max patient weight with all movements Runs Tilting Lift Longitudinal tabletop Transversal tabletop Scan Source-to-film distance Angulation Compressor (cone run in X-ray field) Tube rotation I.I. lift Speed Tilting Lift Transversal tabletop Scan slow 4.5 /sec fast 6.5 /sec (adjustable) 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable) 50 mm/sec (2"/sec) 10% (fixed) from 30 mm/sec (1.2"/sec) to 200 mm/sec (7.9"/sec) (adjustable) with speeding step for small or wide movements 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) 10% (fixed) 11.2 /sec (adjustable) 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable) 40 mm/sec (1.6"/sec) 20% (fixed) + 90 / - 90 800 mm (31.5") fixed 320 mm (12.6") 1600 mm (62.9") 1000 - 1500 mm (39.4" 59.1") + 40 / - 40 250 mm (9.8") + 180 / - 90 38 mm (1.5") 765 mm (30.1") 605 mm (23.8")
520 x 550 x 1950 mm (20.4" x 21.6" x 76.8") 284 kg (626.1 lbs)
Source-to-film distance Angulation Compressor I.I. lift (optional)
(Rev. 4)
4-3
APOLLO
Features data and measures Distance X-ray field centre / table head extremity Distance X-ray field centre / table feet extremity Skin-to-film distance Film-to-fixed I.I. distance Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I. (SFD versions) Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I. (All Digital versions) Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift completely lowered Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift completely lifted 390 mm (15.4") 390 mm (15.4") 65 mm (2.6") for curved tabletop 83 mm (3.3") for flat tabletop 19 mm (0.7") (without parallax correct.) 84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop 102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop 26 mm (1.0") for curved tabletop 44 mm (1.7") for flat tabletop 84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop 102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop choice of 45-65 mm (1.7"-2.5") for curved tabletop choice of 63-83 mm (2.5"-3.3") for flat tabletop 138 mm (5.4") for curved tabletop 133 mm (5.2") for flat tabletop 388 mm (15.3") for curved tabletop 383 mm (15.1") for flat tabletop from 3 kg (6.6 lbs) to 15 kg (33.1 lbs) with 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) step
Minimum distance compressor cone tabletop Max distance compressor cone tabletop Compression force Tabletop Size
2379 x 750 mm (93.7" x 29.5") for curved tabletop 2356 x 738 mm (92.7" x 29.0") for flat tabletop 2214 x 650 mm (87.2" x 25.6") for curved tabletop 2214 x 554 mm (87.2" x 21.8") for flat tabletop policarbonate carbon fibre with Rohacell filler < 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al < 0.3 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al integrated smooth with curvature smooth flat 4-4
(Rev. 4)
Radio-transparent area size
Standard material Optional material (for curved tabletop only) Filtration for standard model Filtration for carbon fibre model (for curved tabletop only) Accessories holder guides Surface
APOLLO
Accessories for curved tabletop Footrest (standard) Headrest and shoulder rest (standard) Handgrips (standard) Compression band (optional) Legs support (optional) Lateral cassette holder (optional) Accessories for flat tabletop Footrest (standard) Headrest and shoulder rest (standard) Handgrips (standard) Compression band (optional) Legs support (optional) Lateral cassette holder (optional) support surface 300 x 550 mm (11.8" x 21.6") ca with shoulder stoppers ergonomic with winder adjustable adjustable for lateral projections support surface 400 x 600 mm (15.7" x 23.6") ca with cushions and shaped shoulder stoppers integrated ergonomic with winder adjustable adjustable for lateral projections
Spot Film Device (NOT present on All Digital version) Accepted cassette sizes Divisions on a line Crossed divisions Spot Film Device movement Operating mode Minimum fluoro-to-exposure switching time Maximum fluoro-to-exposure switching time Average speed in rapid sequence Leaded shutters Grid Head I.I. fixing AEC from 13x18 (5"x7") to 35x43 (14"x17") from 1 to 4 in 4 and in 6 with feed belts without tray standard program and rapid sequence 0.8 sec 1.2 sec 2 im/sec integrated vibrating, parkable pre-set pre-set
(Rev. 4)
4-5
APOLLO
Collimator 2 axis collimator rectangular and square 3 axis collimator rectangular, square and iris Additional filtration (optional) for both with additional filters movement models (2 mm Al / 1 Al + 0.1 mm Cu / 1 Al + 0.2 mm Cu) manual or motorized automatic Limitation manual: by means of joystick on console and buttons on collimator Operating mode automatic with / without Hold mode manual Light for centering with timed 100W lamp (min 160 lux @ 1 m) or with on-demand switching off Minimum dimension X-ray field @ 1m < 1 cm2 (0.39 inch2) X-ray field coverage @ 1 m > 43 cm2 (17 inch2) Stray radiation 45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W Total filtration rectangular collimator 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al Total filtration iris collimator 1.0 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al Tomography Type Layer max height Layer increment Layer automatic increment Speed Angles Tomography exposure times (sec) semiarc / plane with electronic algorithm 350 mm (13.8") with 1 mm (0.04") step selectable with automatic increment depending on the tomo angle 11.2 22.4 /sec (adjustable) 7 - 20 - 30 - 45 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Grades speed speed speed speed 7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 20 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.9 30 2.6 2.0 1.6 1.3 45 4.0 3.0 2.4 2.0 from right to left or vice versa (adjustable) sequential program with forward and back exposures until divisions are completed with continuous layer automatic increment and return to the vertical position at the end of each exposure without stops tomography is allowed for variable scan positions depending on the selected angle and layer
Direction Sequential tomography
Scan movement range
APOLLO
4-6
(Rev. 4)
Stepping angio (optional) Modality Automatic only with digital acquisition system

step length: depending on the selected I.I. manual: adjustable with 1 mm step
Direction Interface Controls Console movements Console functions User interface Controls type Safety on movements Environmental conditions Operating conditions
selectable integrated with digital generator and scan
controls with joystick on table side with buttons controls with graphic display, function keys and LED signalling "Dead man" single fault on the HW chain driving movement and feedback
Temperature: Humidity: Pressure: Temperature: Humidity: Pressure:
from +10 to +40 from 30 to 75 % from 700 to 1060 hPa from -20 to +70 95% non condensing > 630 hPa
Conditions for transport and storage
(Rev. 3)
4-7
APOLLO
4.2
Formats division table in centimeters
13x18
18x13
18x24
9x24
9x12
24x18
12x18
24x24
12x24
12x12
24x30
12x30
30x24
15x24
15x12
10x24
10x12
30x30
15x30
10x30
18x43
43x18
21x18
14x18
15x40
40x15
20x15
13x15
10x15
20x40
10x40
40x20
20x20
13x20
10x20
30x35
15x35
10x35
35x30
17x30
12x30
30x40
15x40
10x40
40x30
20x30
13x30
10x30
35x35
17x35
12x35
35x43
17x43
12x43
43x35
21x35
14x35
11x35
G
APOLLO
NOTE: The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction (patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is nominal.
4-8
(Rev. 4)
4.3
Formats division table in inches
5x7
7x5
8x10
4x10
4x5
10x8
5x8
10x12
5x12
12x10
6x10
6x5
4x10
4x5
9.5x9.5
4.7x9.5
3x9.5
7x17
17x7
8.5x7
5.7x7
4.3x7
11x14
5.5x14
3.7x14
14x11
7x11
4.7x11
3.5x11
14x14
7x14
4.7x14
14x17
7x17
4.7x17
17x14
8.5x14
5.7x14
NOTE: The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction (patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is nominal.
(Rev. 3)
4-9
APOLLO
4.4
Standards and regulations

Apollo was designed and built in compliance with the following regulations: IEC/EN 60601-1 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1: General requirements for safety 1: collateral standard: safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems IEC/EN 60601-1-2 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1: General requirements for safety 2: collateral standard: electromagnetic compatibility requirements and test IEC/EN 60601-1-3 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1: General requirements for safety collateral standard: general requirements for radiation protection in diagnostic X-ray equipment IEC/EN 60601-2-32 (with exclusion of clause 22.4.5) Medical Electrical Equipment Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of associated equipment of X-ray equipment.
0051
The EC symbol certifies the conformity of Apollo to Directive 93/42/EEC.
Versions C-CSA-US, knowable by the identification code with last digit "1" (ex 9784xxxxx1), are produced in compliance, more than above listed standards, also with as indicated below: CFR 21 Code Federal Regulation. Sub Chapter J CAN/CSA C22.2 No 60601-1-M90 Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for safety UL Std No 60601-1 (2nd edition) Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for safety.
APOLLO
4-10
(Rev. 3)
4.5
Dimensions
A: with IB 9 min. 600mm (23.6") max 1400mm (55.1") with IB 12 min. 695mm (27.4") max 1400mm (55.1") with IB 16 min. 775mm (30.5") max 1400mm (55.1") B: with IB 9 min. 1880mm (74.8") max 2680mm (105.5") with IB 12 min. 1975mm (77.8") max 2680mm (105.5") with IB 16 min. 2055mm (80.9") max 2680mm (105.5")
Figure 4-1
(Rev. 3)
4-11
APOLLO
APOLLO
4-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation
PRE-INSTALLATION
The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation performed will ensure the remote-controlled Apollo table will work properly. The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance necessary right from the pre-installation stage (if requested, to check the positioning of the equipment inside the X-ray room). The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo table according to the choice of the most suitable floor plate (Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2). The standard floor fixing plate (Figure 5-1) is suitable for slabs with a bearing capacity of more than 2400kg/m2 (499lbs/feet2) (weight of machine fitted with 16" IB and considering a patient of 150kg / 330.7lbs = 1160kg / 2557.5lbs on a support surface of 0.48m2 / 5.16feet2).
NOTE: The "All Digital" version is only slightly lighter than the Spot Film Device version so its not convenient to differentiate the calculation of the bearing capacity needed for installation. Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 420x1310 mm (16.5"x51.6") until you reach the concrete of the slab, so that the top surface of the plate is flush with the floor. The concrete surface of the slab, under the plate, must be rough enough to ensure the concrete to be poured adheres properly. Position the plate and carefully level it so that the surface obtained is as level as possible. The plate already has threaded holes and M16 bolts for the anchorage of the base; these holes must be protected (e.g. by inserting the fixing bolts) so that they are not blocked up during installation; pour the concrete with a cement/sand ratio of 1:2.5, remove the surplus and let it dry for six hours.
Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate

(Rev. 3)
5-1
APOLLO
If the bearing capacity of the slab is not sufficient (less than 2400 kg/m2 / 499 lbs/feet2), a weight distribution plate is available and must be requested at the time of the order (purchase code 5584902500 Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2: Weight distribution plate This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways: 1. Sunk into the floor 2. Fixed to the floor. In the first case (1) follow the instructions given above for a plate of a smaller size and be sure to remove the upper surface of the floor over an area of 2700x1600 mm (106.3"x63"). In the second case (2), the plate must be fixed to the floor taking advantage of the relative fixing holes and masked through the construction of raised section that covers the structure of the plate itself.
NOTE: The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical, so its important to position it in the correct way (Figure 5-2).
APOLLO
5-2
(Rev. 3)
5.1
Space requirements
NOTE: In order to unload the main body of the device from the truck, it is necessary either that the truck has an elevating lift or to use an elevating fork cart. When performing the overview of the location (installation room, aisles, doors ecc.) please remind that the main body of the device after having removed the wood box has dimensions given in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than 2550 mm (100.4"); operating room on the front is advised to be 1000 mm (39.4"); on the sides leave room as detailed in Figure 5-5.
(Rev. 3)
5-3
APOLLO
Under floor conducts (Figure 5-4) must meet the following requirements: C: suggested section: 20x10 cm (7.9"x3.9") / max distance between the pit and the cabinet: 9 m (29.53 feet). D: suggested section: 10 cm (3.9") / max distance between the cabinet and the control panel 14 m (45.93 feet).
NOTE: If distances are larger than those indicated above (C and D) ask adequate length of connecting cables at order. WARNING: The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be more easily accessed during installation and maintenance.
(*)
The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting area) = 800 mm (31.5") The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting area) = 600 mm (23.6")
Figure 5-4: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation without any limit on table movements
APOLLO
5-4
(Rev. 3)
Figure 5-5: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation with Chest Stand without any limit on table movements
(Rev. 3)
5-5
APOLLO
5.2
Electrical provisions
POWER SUPPLY FREQUENCY ABSORBED POWER (table only) ABSORBED CURRENT (table only) APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE
380-400Vac 3 phase +Ground 415-480Vac 3 phase +Ground 50-60Hz 5kVA 7A < 1
NOTE: Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray room including the Apollo table equals 25-30kVA. WARNING: The equipment can be connected directly to the mains or in cascade with the ray generator, a preferable alternative because, when the generator is powered down, the table and the accessories connected to it (e.g. the image capturing system or chest stand) are turned off as well. In both cases the wires of the three-phase power supply must have a crosssection of at least 4.0 mm. Connection directly to the mains: Make provision for an automatic switch with fuse as per the current regulations in the country of installation. Connection to the generator: Check the generator manual to make sure that the connection points are right for the load and insulation values. The general grounding must respond to the standards in force. If the grounding of the equipment is not good enough, it might jeopardise the safety of the operator and/or cause the malfunctioning of the electronic equipment.
APOLLO
5-6
(Rev. 3)
5.3
Adaptation to the mains voltage

The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo table is fitted with two sets of (R S T) primary winding power supply terminals. One group is for connecting the 380V power supply, the other 400V. The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V or 400V connection. This pre-disposition must be specified on ordering and will be incorporated in the factory before shipment. Before powering up the equipment, make sure that the mains voltage corresponds with the predisposition of the equipment by checking that: the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating plate is described in paragraph 3.1) the primary main power supply insulation transformer T1 connection corresponds with the mains voltage.
5.4
Environmental conditions
The data in paragraph 4.1 must be complied with for the environmental operating and transport/storage conditions.
(Rev. 3)
5-7
APOLLO
APOLLO
5-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Installation
INSTALLATION
WARNING: During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical connection described below, the safety regulations in force must be respected and the precautions described below must be taken: wear accident prevention clothing (boots, gloves, goggles when necessary) always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out procedures that put you or others at risk make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the installation is completed or said electricity is required for installation purposes. when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is in the final phases of completion, make sure the power supply is cut off by means of a switch before accessing any of the parts that can be a danger.
NOTE: The instructions present on this chapter are referred to a standard unit versions (with Spot Film Device). For "All Digital" versions, all instructions relevant to SFD must be intended to the I.I. support frame assy. This I.I. support frame has mechanical characteristics equal to the SFD one, but any devices for cassettes, grid and shutters are not present. For delivery, handling and assembly purposes, the machine is broken down into units that must be put together: Base with beam and column (Assembly 1) Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2) Spot Film Device (Assembly 3) Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4) Tabletop (Assembly 5)
v v v v v
Assemble the units by following the instructions below.
(Rev. 3)
6-1
APOLLO
6.1
Base positioning with beam and column

The base assembly with beam and column are shipped in a crate as shown in Figure 6-1. WARNING: Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate, check that this is flat with respect to both axes. Do not use the grubs positioned on the left side of the basement to achieve horizontal alignment of the table; these grubs may be used in the final stages of installation to correct possible elastic deformations of the basement when the table is loaded (see paragraph 6.5).
NOTE: The operations described below require the use of a transpallet. 1. Remove lid "A" and walls "B" of the crate. 2. Remove the wooden beams "C" holding the pallets together, from the pallet. 3. Remove bolts "D" and "E" holding the base assembly to the pallets.
D E B C
C D B
Figure 6-1
APOLLO
6-2
(Rev. 3)
4. Position the transpallet under one of the 2 side pallets "D", raise the base assembly and remove the central pallet "E". Lower the transpallet. 5. Referring to Figure 6-2, insert the transpallet centrally under the base assembly and lift it to free the two side pallets "D". Rest one side of the base on two supports (e.g. the pallets positioned on the corner) leaving the centre part free; suspend the other side, inserting one of the two main beams "C" parallel to the transpallet fork, allowing the side of the base to protrude as much as possible.
Main beam C
Figure 6-2 6. Referring to Figure 6-3, remove the transpallet and position it on the side of the base assembly. Exert leverage on the shoulder and lift the base assembly enough to remove the central pallet "C" and reposition it under the base, in such a way that it is parallel to the long side of the base and subsequently allows the transpallet to be inserted to lift the group. Lower the transpallet.
Main beam C
Figure 6-3
(Rev. 3)
6-3
APOLLO
7. Leaving the transpallet in its present position, slide it under the base in such a way that it is possible to lift the assembly and free the two supports. With the greatest of care, suspend the base assembly on the central main beam "C"; slide the transpallet in completely under the base. 8. Bring the base assembly into the room and follow the above procedure in reverse, positioning the transpallet perpendicularly to the base assembly. Take the base assembly to the fixing plate and try to align the base-plate fixing holes as well as possible. 9. Position the two main wood beams "C" at the side of the base, parallel to the transpallet forks. Lower the base assembly and remove the transpallet. 10. Exerting leverage on one of the two side iron brackets, raise the base assembly enough to remove one of the wooden beams. Gently lower the base assembly until it is resting on the ground. Repeat the operation to remove the remaining wooden beam. 11. Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with those in the anchorage plate. If it is necessary, to move the base assembly to align the fixing holes, use the transpallet.
NOTE: Moving the base while it is resting on the ground by applying leverage to the structure is not advised under any circumstances. This operation could damage the actuators.
12. Close the two fixing holes on head side, 2 grubs are present to adjust the base position in order to avoid interferences during trendelenbourg movement, between middle beam and plastic guides present on the base. Unlock the 2 grubs and fix the base on the floor plate. The grubs adjustment is explained on paragraph 6.5 , items from 10 to 15. At this moment only it is allowed to remove the transport wood frame and lateral iron plate for main beam.
APOLLO
6-4
(Rev. 3)
6.2
Assembly of the Tube support arm

1. Remove the front plate from the column stand. 2. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and, at the same time, position the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing holes on the parts to assemble (front plate tube support arm column section) are aligned (Figure 6-4). 3. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the column before tightening the fixing screws. 4. Position on the frontal part of the X-ray tube arm the microswitch for 0 position setting it in such a way that it is not activated when the X-ray tube rotation pin reaches position 0.
Column section Tube support arm Front plate Micro 0
Figure 6-4
(Rev. 3)
6-5
APOLLO
6.3
Spot Film Device assembly

WARNING: A plate is provided with the Spot Film Device. This must be assembled with the four Spot Film Device support wheels and it will constitute a tool necessary for the installation of the Image Intensifier (paragraph 6.6). The Spot Film Device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and fitted with wheels to make it easier to move and position. 1. Position the Spot Film Device assembly mounted on the transport pallet, near the machine. 2. Free the four Spot Film Device supports from the safety blocks fixing them to the transport pallet. 3. Remove the Spot Film Device from the pallet being careful to pay the utmost attention not to damage it. 4. Remove all screws fixing the Spot Film Device, the two safety rods holding the inclination motor support on the end wall and remove the protection of the inclination potmeter (Figure 6-5). Remove the two top hooks from the Spot Film Device (one per side) (Figure 6-6) so that positioning can be carried out.
Safety rod
Protection of the inclination potmeter
Safety rod
Figure 6-5
APOLLO
6-6
(Rev. 3)
5. Position the Spot Film Device assembly near the end wall and make sure that it is possible to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and on the inclination motor support. If it is necessary to lift or lower the Spot Film Device to align the fastening holes, use the adjustable supports while being careful to avoid forcing the Spot Film Device on the angulation motor's fusion attachment (Figure 6-6). 6. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has been checked, it is possible to fix, without tightening, the Spot Film Device assembly with the twenty-two bolts supplied (eleven bolts per side). If the Spot Film Device is imagined as a plane, it must be at right angles to the end wall where it is fixed. Check that the two elements are at right angles to each other using a bubble level. If it is necessary to make an adjustment to obtain perfect right angles between the Spot Film Device and the end wall, adjust the adjustable supports of the Spot Film Device support until the position required is reached (Figure 6-6). 7. Insert the two centering pins into their holes (Figure 6-6), one on each side, taking care that the threaded part can be accessed from outside, and then tighten the twenty-two fastening screws. Remount the two top hooks removed at point "4" above.
Centering pin
90
Top hook
Figure 6-6 8. Remove the four Spot Film Device assembly adjustable supports.
(Rev. 3)
6-7
APOLLO
9. Carry out the Spot Film Device wiring pre-arranged on the right-hand side of the end wall. The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device. The wires must be routed in such a way that they are parallel to and not on top of each other (Figure 6-7). The X16 wire, fixed to an anchoring plate, must be placed on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device, interfacing with the flat cable (X16) installed in the factory. The following table is an aid in the identification of the cables and where they must be connected (see also Figure 6-7).
Connector/Cable X101 X68 X44 X19 X14 X16 Ground cable Nr 8 A.E.C. chamber cable Point of connection Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Interface connector X16 A10 PCB fixing plate A.E.C. chamber cable
X68 X14 X19 X44 X101 X16 Cable clip
Ground cable
Figure 6-7
APOLLO
6-8
(Rev. 3)
NOTE: The automatic exposimeter device is an optional and consequently the A.E.C. chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter chamber is fitted to the Spot Film Device. 10. Position the front panel of the Spot Film Device and fix it with the hinge on the left-hand wall. Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the PCB of the key pad fitted on the machine A8. Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the Spot Film Device's lefthand wall; shut the panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure 6-8).
X16
Figure 6-8
(Rev. 3)
6-9
APOLLO
6.4
Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly

The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to the table fixing pin position and the reference lines for fixing the respective belts. For this reason there are two labels indicating the lefthand and right-hand arms.
NOTE: Both the table top support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the transport. Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled, the relative belts have been tensioned and before mounting the tabletop and moving the arms. Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-9): 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes. Remove the small plate from the beams. Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts. Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of the belt on the relative pulleys, following the route indicated in the figure. Check that the phasing reference lines marked above the belts of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond; otherwise correct the position of the belt of the arm. 5. Position the arm in such a way as to be able screw up the small plate removed at point "2" using the three bolts. At this point the belt is properly tensioned.
Belt aligment reference
Arm belt
Coordination belt Outside support
Small plate
Beam side protection
Figure 6-9
APOLLO
6-10
(Rev. 3)
6. Do up all the six arm blocking bolts. 7. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during transport. For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the right-hand arm.
(Rev. 3)
6-11
APOLLO
6.5
Machine cable connection

The machine is partially factory wired, while the rest of the wires are provided separately; all have to be wired up to the machine as described below.
NOTE: The wire chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-10) are made in such as way that they can be opened to permit the wires to be inserted. Take care to note when opening the chains the location of the individual covers. As these are not all the same, they will have to be put back properly when the chains are closed. At this stage only the machine wires can be set up so as to permit powering the table and to make the remaining installation process stage easier, or the system wires can also be connected (high tension cables, anode, etc.). How to proceed in this regard is a matter for the installer's own discretion. When you decide also to connect the system wires it is advisable to refer to paragraph 6.7 for tube-collimator group installation.
Figure 6-10 1. Fix the "B" chain to the upper locking bracket.
APOLLO
6-12
(Rev. 3)
NOTE: To easily identify the end to fix to the upper bracket, check as follow: on the external side of the link the code number is present. The end must be fixed on upper bracket is with 1 link code 157.150.100.1 and the following with code 158.150.100.1. The end must be fixed on lower bracket has all links with code 157.150.100.1. 2. To avoid cable-braiding, is suggested to position the cable chain as showed in Figure 6-10. House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain "B". Some of these wires are much shorter than others. The shorter ones should be connected to the A11 base connector board and the longer ones in the table's electrical cabinet and that of the generator if you wish also to connect up the system cables. 3. Before you start, chain "B" should be positioned as in Figure 6-11. 4. It is advisable at this stage not to close the wiring chain but just to install some covers so as to secure the wires inside them. Connect wires X20, X46, X75, X77, X88, X96, X97 and X98 to the A11 base connector board (Figure 6-12), threading them through "C" (Figure 6-11). The base connector board has a dust guard that has to be removed when connecting the wires and then replaced. Connect ground cables 5, 7, 8, 9 and 11 (lift I.I. - optional) to the ground bar (W2) in the base unit (Figure 6-13).
C
Figure 6-11
5. Connect ground cable 10 between the ground connection W2 on the machine base unit and the ground rod (W1) in the cabinet.
(Rev. 3)
6-13
APOLLO
6. Connect all the output cables in "C" and from chain "B" to the machine cabinet: X68, X19, X14, X16, X44, X101, X73, E4, X71, E2, X106 (lift I.I. optional), X70, E3, X20, X46, X99.5, X99.6, X74, E1, X99.1, X99.2, X105 and X45 as indicated in the following table (see also Figure 6-13). 7. Connect the console cable (X8) to the cabinet; connect the foot control (cable X41) to the console. 8. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T clamps on the insulation transformer inside the cabinet. Connect the ground cable to the rod (W1) in the cabinet. 9. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories when it is decided wire them up during the procedures described above.
NOTE: To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to install the collimator (see paragraph 6.7) and connect it by cable X45 or simulate collimator presence; in this case it is possible for example to use a male CANNON 37 pin connector with two voltage partitions built by a resistor of 4.7k between pins X45-18 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7k between pins X45-16 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7k between pins X4519 e X45-33 and a resistor of 4.7k between pins X45-17 and X45-33. At this point the machine can be turned on and perform movements. In this stage the mechanical alignment of the moving beams with respect to the basement must be checked and possibly corrected. In order to do so proceed as follows: 10. Move de equipment up/down and tilt it in both directions; if the middle beam during same movements is in touch with parts of the basements, proceed as by the following step, otherwise will be not necessary other adjustments. 11. Release the two screws fixing the basement to the ground on the left side of the basement, i.e. close to the regulation grubs. 12. Act on the regulation grubs to correct deformations of the side wall of the basement: the process is of the trial and error type. Usually it is advisable to screw in the grub on the opposite side where the interference is present in the up-down movement of the beam. 13. Tight again the screws holding the basement to the ground. 14. Check again the movements following the procedure from step 10. 15. Make a few tilting movements to verify the correct situation and stop the procedure. This procedure should be repeated at the end of installation when the table is loaded with all its accessories (II, X-ray tube, table top, ecc.)
APOLLO
6-14
(Rev. 3)
Location on the Table
Table side cable code
Cabinet side cable code X34 X35 X36
Location on the Cabinet
Description Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X68 X37 X38 X39
Spot Film Device activation PCB A4
Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Button pad PCB A8 Spot Film Device PCB A10
X19 X14 X16 X44
X19 X14 X16 X44 X0.10
Input PCB A2 Input PCB A2 Input PCB A2 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Terminal block X0.10
Spot Film Device potmeter cable Spot Film Device cable Button Pad Cable Spot Film Device 24Vac power supply
Spot Film Device PCB A10
X101 X0.11 Terminal block X0.11
Emergency stop button cable
(Rev. 3)
6-15
APOLLO
Location on the Table Base unit connector PCB A11 Base unit connector PCB A11
Table side cable code X20 X46 X99.5
Cabinet side cable code X20 X46 X0.1 X0.2 X0.5
Location on the Cabinet Input PCB A2 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Terminal block X0.1
Description Machine potmeter cable PCB connection cable X46
Angulation connectors PCB A13 X99.6 Terminal block X0.2 Terminal block X0.5 Terminal block X0.6
SID motor cable
Angulation connector PCB A13
X74 X0.6 X99.1 X99.1 Compressor PCB A15 X99.2 X99.2 X105 X45 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Cabinet connector PCB A12
Emergency micro switch cable
Angulation connector PCB A13
Compressor motor cable
Angulation connector PCB A13 Collimator
X105 X45
PCB connection cable Collimator cable
APOLLO
6-16
(Rev. 3)
Location on the Table
Cabinet side cable code X8 X22 X0.7
Location on the Cabinet Cabinet CPU PCB A1 Input PCB A2 Terminal block X0.7
Description
Control panel - CPU PCB A14
X8 X0.8 X0.9 X0.10 X106.1 X0.3 X0.4 10 X70 X71 X72 Terminal block X0.8 Terminal block X0.9 Terminal block X0.10 Terminal block X0.3
Control panel
I.I. lift (optional) X106.2 Base unit ground rod (W2) Beam motor Angulation motor Middle beam motor 10 Terminal block X0.4 Cabinet ground rod (W1) Inverter box Inverter box Inverter box
Lift motor cable I.I.
Ground cables 10 Power supply cable Main beam motor Power supply cable Angulation motor Power supply cable Middle beam motor
(Rev. 3)
6-17
APOLLO
Location on the Table Scan motor Base unit ground rod (W2) Angulation motor Scan motor Main beam motor Middle beam motor
Cabinet side cable code X73
Location on the Cabinet Inverter box Cabinet ground rod (W1) Terminal block X0.E2 Terminal block X0.E4 Terminal block X0.E1 Terminal block X0.E3
Description Power supply cable Scan motor Ground cables 10 Angulation motor ground cable Scan moto ground cable Main beam motor ground cable Middle beam motor ground cable
10
10 E2 E4 E1 E3
APOLLO
6-18
(Rev. 3)
ANGULATION CONNECTOR CARD - A13

2 4 3 4 3 4 3
X89
1 2
2 1 4
X90
3
2 1 4
X85
3
2 1 4
X86
3 1
X100
2
2 1
X91
2
2 1
X87
2
2 1
X82 X97
X105
X80
X79 V3
X76 V4
2
X74
2
X94
1 8
X95 X98 X99
BASE UNIT CONNECTOR CARD - A11

X96 X20
X75
X83
V1
X77
X92
X84
1 2
X78
V2
X88
X93
X81
X46
X98
X97
Figure 6-12: Connector points diagram for machine connector board
(Rev. 3)
6-19
APOLLO
X20
X19
X14
X16
7
X22
X12
1 2
X21 X10 X11
X17
X15
X13
1 2
X4
X3A
INPUT CARD - A2
X3B
A2
X18
X12
1 2
X1 X2 X7
X4
A4
X34
1 2
X9
CPU CARD - A1 X8
A1
X3B
SFD ACTIVATION CARD - A4
X70, X71, X72, X73
X3A
X35
X33
S1
X36 X39 X38 X37

X25 X12
X15
A2 1
X6
X5B
X5A
X6
X5A
A3
X30 X107
X23
R, S, T CABINET GROUND ROD (W1)
X5B X27
OUTPUT CARD - A3
X17
X29
X26
X46 X105
5 9 7 8 10 10 (to the cabinet)
COMPRESSOR CARD - A15

X25 X28 X31 X29 X24
1 2
X21
X32
X26
X47
X49
9 1 2 1 2 1
X48
4
X45 X44
CABINET CONNECTOR CARD - A12
BASE UNIT GROUND ROD (W2)

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 E4 E3 E2 E1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 S3 S3 10 10 N N
X99
X0
TERMINAL BLOCK X0
X42 X41 X8
A15
X0.11 X0.10 X0.9 X0.8 X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1
Figure 6-13: Cable and ground connection points diagram
(Rev. 3)
6-21
APOLLO
6.6
Image intensifier installation
NOTE: Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four Spot Film Device support wheels, using the nuts supplied, in such a way as to get a trolley like the one shown in the Figure, for the purposes of the I.I. installation.
Figure 6-14
(Rev. 3)
6-23
APOLLO
6.6.1
9-12 fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation

1. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of the machine. 2. Use the lift control to lower the table until the I.I.'s fastening holes are aligned with those on the plates. You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps.
Figure 6-15 3. Fasten the I.I. to the plates with the screws, and tighten.
APOLLO
6-24
(Rev. 3)
4. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is necessary, slacken screws "A" (Figure 6-16) on both sides to get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device, or screws "B" (Figure 6-16) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.
B
Figure 6-16 5. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-17
(Rev. 3)
6-25
APOLLO
6.6.2
16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model)

1. Using the bolts supplied fix the two I.I. fixing plates as indicated in Figure 6-18 taking into consideration the 530 mm (20.9") distance between the two guides. Any adjustments to this distance may be made with the plate-guide fixing screws.
530 (20.9")
Figure 6-18 2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of the machine. 3. Use the lift control to lower the table so that the I.I. fixing plates run inside the Spot Film Device's walls and that the holes "A" (6 per side Figure 6-19) on the walls are aligned with the fastening holes on the I.I. support guides. It is advisable to proceed cautiously at this stage to prevent any damage to the I.I. occurring. It is therefore best to lower the table by small steps. 4. Fasten the plates to the Spot Film Device's shoulders by means of the screws provided. 5. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is necessary, slacken the I.I. guide-plate support fastenings screws to get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device or screws "A" (6 per side - Figure 6-19) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.
APOLLO
6-26
(Rev. 3)
Figure 6-19 6. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-20
(Rev. 3)
6-27
APOLLO
6.6.3
Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation

WARNING: The I.I. lift movement can produce collision between I.I. and inner SFD parts, proceed with maximum attention to the actions indicated in the following paragraphs. The positioning of the I.I. lift is obtained by a motor which movement is stopped by 2 microswitches: S28 for upper position, S29 for lower position. The I.I.-lift end run positions can be adjusted modifying the microswitches activating cams.
APOLLO
6-28
(Rev. 3)
6.6.3.1
9 with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation 1. Check that: measuring chamber is removed grid in park position cassettes jaws completely open. 2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals. 3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from set-up. 4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage plate
Figure 6-21 5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly. 6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-22). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided. 7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-22) between the I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. this enables proper alignment of the two plates.
(Rev. 3)
6-29
APOLLO
8. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where there are those already present. Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-22 9. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam. 10. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same, set cell 133 again and move by joystick the I.I. lift on the upper end limit. Check that during the I.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between I.I. and internal SFD parts. 11. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the machine.
APOLLO
6-30
(Rev. 3)
6.6.3.2
12 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation 1. Check that: measuring chamber is removed grid in park position cassettes jaws completely open. 2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals. 3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from set-up. 4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage plate
Figure 6-23 5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly. 6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-24). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided. 7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-24) between the I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. This enables proper alignment of the two plates.
(Rev. 3)
6-31
APOLLO
8. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where there are those already present. Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
APOLLO
6-32
(Rev. 3)
6.6.3.3
16 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation 1. Check that: measuring chamber is removed grid in park position cassettes jaws completely open. 2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals. 3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from set-up. 4. Fix the I.I.'s two anchoring brackets as indicated in the Figure.
Anchoring brackets
Figure 6-25 5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly. 6. Use the lift control to lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the anchoring brackets are in line with the corresponding four holes in the lift plate (Figure 6-26). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided.
(Rev. 3)
6-33
APOLLO
7. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where the bracket fastening screws are (Figure 6-26). Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
APOLLO
6-34
(Rev. 3)
6.7
Installation of the Tube - Collimator group
NOTE: International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray beam must be greater than 2.5 mm Al.eq. The Villa collimators have 0.5 mm Al.eq. filtration; The Ralco collimators have 1.0 mm Al.eq. filtration; Taking into consideration the filtration in the ray tube, as shown on its technical plate, add the necessary filtration with the aluminium disks provided with the tube or with the collimator kit; these disks can be inserted into the ray output window. NOTE: The collimator kit consists of the following: collimator fastening cone H=17 mm (0.7") additional 0.5 mm Al filters collimator installation spacers of 1.5 mm (0.06") and of 3 mm (0.1") 6x25 and 6x30 fastening screws 1. Position the tube support in the corresponding fastening pin so as to join together the two tube rotation release levers (Figure 6-27). Insert the support screw onto the pin and tighten in the position that it is best for the installation of the tube.
Fastening pin
Support screw
Release levers
Tube support
Figure 6-27
(Rev. 3)
6-35
APOLLO
NOTE: Point 2 only applies where the system is supplied with the Villa or the Ralco collimator. 2. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the collimator fastening cone (Figure 6-28). When doing this take due account of the distance between the tube focus and the cone/collimator plane; to ensure proper correspondence between the field of the rays and the collimator light field, this distance must be 801 mm (3.15"0.04"). To do this the collimator kit's spacers have to be used (refer to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to determine the point of focus). Fix in position with the collimator's screws, taking account of the fact that the choice of screw length is determined by the number of spacers employed. WARNING: Incorrect choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fastening of the X-ray tube group where short screws are used or possible damage to the casing if the screws used are too long. 3. Install the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks and connect it to the X45 cable. The collimator cable length is calculated to permit machine servicing even when the collimator is out of beam. With the group at 0 rotation, the corresponding micro safety switch inside the arm must be in n.a. condition.
X-ray tube
Spacer Collimator fastening cone Collimator

Figure 6-28
APOLLO
6-36
(Rev. 3)
4. Wire up the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-29). The cables must be arranged so that the tube can rotate without them getting damaged. The abundance required for that to be permitted will be hidden inside the arm's top cover. Make sure the micro safety switch's cable with the tube at 0 is anchored to the arm so that it is independent from the rest of the cables. These must be as far as possible free from clamps, with just the minimum indispensable, to prevent damage on tube rotation. It is advisable only to use the fastening points indicated for the machine.
Figure 6-29 5. Once the cabling inside the X-ray tube support arm and checked its functionality, after having tested the rotation of the X-ray tube proceed to mount the arm cover (Figure 6-30 4 screws preset on the column stand + 8 screws on the arm). To complete this operation it is necessary to power the SID and remove the chain and its right side support (Figure 6-31) gaining access to the fixing screws on the column stand. 6. Join the cover to the X-ray tube support by the two front half circles (Figure 6-30). Only at this point proceed to the cabling of the cables inside the column.
(Rev. 3)
6-37
APOLLO
Figure 6-30 7. Open the chain, previously removed, and insert all cables coming from the X-ray tube collimator group, making them run parallel. 8. Close and mount back the chain on its supports and then on the column, having the cables coming out from the left side , on the back of the chain (Figure 6-31). 9. Tighten the cables on the dedicated fixing point on the column, following the routing of the cables already present; insert them in the back chains.
Chain support
Figure 6-31
APOLLO
6-38
(Rev. 3)
6.8
Mounting the covers

When installation is complete, mount the covers, referring to Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33. Install the compressor arm with the cup.
(Rev. 3)
6-39
APOLLO
APOLLO
6-40
(Rev. 3)
*
(*) Cover supplied only where there is I.I. lift
Figure 6-32: Covers installation diagram (front view)
(Rev. 3)
6-41
APOLLO
Figure 6-33: Covers installation diagram (rear view)
(Rev. 3)
6-43
APOLLO
6.9
6.9.1
Tabletop assembly
Curved tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions. On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the relative holes on the tabletop head mounts. 1. Remove the two iron beams at the extremities of the tabletop, generally used to avoid possible plane deflections during transport. 2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight washers. 3. Position the tabletop on the arms till the locking pins fit into the relative holes (Figure 6-34). 4. Screw on all the eight pins the relative nuts and washers; lock tight.
Spacer "B" Nuts and washers Pins Spacer "B"
Figure 6-34
(Rev. 3)
6-45
APOLLO
WARNING: The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an adaptation to avoid any collision risk between SFD cover and accessories fixation device. Proceed as follow: a. By moving table top and scanning, put the patient handle at the centre of the external part of upper SFD cover (Figure 6-35).
b. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between upper SFD cover and fixation handle device: it must be not less than 2/3 mm (Figure 6-35). If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer "B" as shows in Figure 6-34 up to obtain the desiderate size.
2/3mm
Figure 6-35 c. Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top and accessories fixation increases because of the SFD small flexion caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and check that distance between SFD and accessories fixation is not less than 4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as indicated.
APOLLO
6-46
(Rev. 3)
6.9.2
Flat tabletop assembly

The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions. On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the relative holes on the tabletop fixing plates. 1. Remove from the tabletop the four fixing plates "A". 2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight washers. 3. Lock the fixing plates "A" on the support arms by the pins and relevant nuts (Figure 6-36). 4. Lock the tabletop to the fixing plates by the eight screws removed on item 1.
Nuts and washers Spacer "B" Fixing plates "A" Pins Spacer "B"
Figure 6-36
(Rev. 3)
6-47
APOLLO
WARNING: The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an adaptation to avoid any collision risk. Proceed as follow: a. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between upper SFD cover and tabletop profile: it must be not less than 2/3 mm. If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer "B" as shows in Figure 6-36 up to obtain the desiderate size.
b. Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top and tabletop profile increases because of the SFD small flexion caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and check that distance between SFD and tabletop profile is not less than 4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as indicated.
APOLLO
6-48
(Rev. 3)
6.10
Final verifications
Once the mechanical installation has been completed, it is necessary to configure the Apollo table and check its functionality. To do so proceed as follows: Check that the beam movement does not interfere with the basement and if necessary implement the corrective actions described in the procedure at the end of paragraph 6.5, point from 8 to 13 Centre the middle beam into plastic sliding parts of the base when tilting angle is negative (trendelembourg) as described on paragraph 6.5, items from 10 to 15 Enter the room dimension data (see paragraph 11.1) Enter configuration parameters (see paragraph 11.1) Measure the current real speed of the movements (see paragraph 11.1); this operation is fundamental in case the power line is 60Hz Check the functionality of all movements for the different functional modalities (Spot film device, Tomography, Angiography, Digital) and verify the anticollision safeties After having completing the calibration of the X-ray tube, implement centering procedures for X-ray tube Collimator - Serial Changer - II (see chapter 19) Check that the cassette pusher position is correctly adjusted in function of the cassette type used. It must press in such a way the cassette position is maintained also with table in vertical position, but without create a critical condition for cassette ejection. The check must be done with minimum 18x24 (8"x10") and 35x43 (14"x17") cassettes size. If the pusher adjustment is not optimized, unlock the 6 fixing screws and slide the pusher plate "A" in the required direction (Figure 6-37).
(Rev. 3)
6-49
APOLLO
Pusher plate "A"
Figure 6-37 Check centering for the different cassette format (see chapter 19); if necessary correct as needed.
APOLLO
6-50
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table
THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE

The Apollo table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge management and control circuit. The circuit is based on PCBs called: A1 CPU PCB A2 "input" PCB A3 "output" PCB A4 Spot Film Device motor "power driver" PCB (not present in "All Digital" version) A14 "control panel" PCB A15 "compressor motor command" PCB (not present in the version without compressor). A16 "additional collimator filters control" PCB (for collimator with motorized additional filters movement version only). It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCBs listed above is from their names and they are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception of the control panel PCB. Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that could come in useful, is given below. The "control panel" A14 PCB is fitted with a Motorola MC68332 processor and a 128K x8 Eprom. The job of the program contained in this Eprom is to decode the state of the joystick and the keys and send this information to the CPU on the CAN BUS. Moreover, its job is also to receive the status of the led and the graphic and alphanumeric strings to show on the display, again from the CPU. The A1"CPU" PCB is also equipped with a Motorola MC68332 processor the job of which is to act as the main processor and a 512K x8 Eprom. The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the equipment including, as said before, dialoguing with the control panel. Also present are: a flash eprom containing the alarm history and the machine cycle times an EEprom containing the equipment set up data and the positions related to MODE 1-2-3 keys. a Ram containing the date and time. Furthermore, the data regarding the alarm history and the machine cycles are initially deposited in the Ram and every ten minutes they are transferred to the flash eprom.
(Rev. 3)
7-1
APOLLO
There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a Supervisor microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the supervision and serial and parallel control program for the channels responsible for the movements. The release of the equipment management software contained in the Eprom on the CPU is shown on the control panel display for three seconds when the equipment is powered up.
APOLLO
7-2
(Rev. 3)
7.1
7.1.1
Functioning sequences
Powering up and initialisation sequence
On powering up the electronics of the CPU, the control panel, the input PCB and part of the output PCB is powered through the T2 transformer. At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the checks that can make sure all the conditions are regular. If that is the case, both the main processor and the controller activate the respective "ready" relay after an interval of three seconds. The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series. One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by the series of these two relays. When they are activated, they therefore permit the energising of the K1L that, through the closure of its contacts, will power the table's power circuits. At this point, the procedure for the initialisation of the Spot Film Device begins the purpose of which is to move the inside parts of the Spot Film Device to the default positions. While this is happening, i.e. from the time the power circuits have been powered up and when the organs of the Spot Film Device have reached the positions defined, all the movements of the table are disabled and the control panel's display shows the flashing message. "Initialisation. Please wait" When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed, the control panel display changes and shows the data for the active mode. All the table movements and the functions will, at this point, be enabled.
(Rev. 3)
7-3
APOLLO
7.1.2
Activation sequence for a movement

When a joystick, enabled to activate a movement is pressed, 2 microswitches are activated simultaneously. The first sends the movement activation signal, along the CAN BUS line, from the control panel to the main PCB. The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either from the main processor or the controller. If all the conditions are in order, the processor will activate the circuits that control the engines. Once the feedback potmeter is launched it informs the processor about the position and speed of the movement itself. In order to indicate the working conditions, all the outputs are fitted with a signalling led that lights up when an output, whether a movement output or a controlling output for an external accessory, is active. As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the below is useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
APOLLO
7-4
(Rev. 3)
BLOCK DIAGRAM POWERING UP SEQUENCE

Table power up Electronics power supply T2 ON
BLOCK DIAGRAM SIMPLE MOVEMENT

Movement Joystick activation SF OK YES Send SF circuit Hardware Opening Data serial SF OK YES Movement or logic output activation SF OK YES HW power activation SF OK YES Motor movement SF OK YES Potmeter feed back SF OK YES Joystick release output power down Movement stop SF reclosure SF OK NO
NO NO NO NO READY relay power down Signalling ALARMS NO NO
Check electronics OK YES 3 sec. READY relay ON K1L ON
NO
Signalling ALARMS
Hardware electronics check OK YES End of message "Initialisation" SW table motor movement enabling
NO
Turning off READY relay
(Rev. 3)
7-5
APOLLO
7.2
Fault Conditions
Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in operation: Condition fault Operating fault Power circuit faults. These three different situations cause the consequences that are analysed below.
7.2.1
Generation of a condition alarm

While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one of the accessories connected to it. If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example: the generator is not "ready" within the set time), a few movements are disabled by the SW and the relative alarm flashes on the display of the control panel accompanied by an intermittent "beep". To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary to push the reset joystick downwards twice. The first time silences the "beep", the second resets the alarm and restores the normal conditions.
7.2.2
Generation of a operating alarm

If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF control or by other components interacting with the processor, that could seriously compromise the functioning of the equipment, the READY relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control panel. This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault. A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is. To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must be turned off.
APOLLO
7-6
(Rev. 3)
7.2.3
Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit

If a movement of the table or the Spot Film Device should for any reason go over the SW run determined by the potmeter, an emergency end of run will be intercepted. This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the consequent opening of the power control input (X15 pin 10). This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the controller and generate flashing alarm 080 on the control panel display. It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the alarm situation. After removing the cause of the failure, the powering up procedure after the power cutting out must be followed in order to restore the normal operating conditions described in the relevant chapter. As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
(Rev. 3)
7-7
APOLLO
CONDITION ALARM
Malfunction that is: resettable Flashing alarm on display Joystick reset: - 1st beep OFF - 2nd beep alarm OFF Cause of malfunction: removed YES Restore normal operating conditions
FUNCTIONAL ALARM
Malfunction that is: - Single Fault - Component Turning off READY relay Alarm on display: flashing NON resettable Turning off equipment Troubleshooting
POWER ALARM
Malfunction that is: Table emergency Deenergising: K1L Input opening X15 pin 10 Alarm on display: 080 flashing Turning off equipment Troubleshooting
NO
APOLLO
7-8
(Rev. 3)
IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as: generator, TV chain etc. are connected to the input and output PCBs by means of the X0 terminal clamp. The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.
8.1
Output signals from the Apollo table

The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit (ULN2803) NPN active at 0 V. No circuits with pull up resistances of over 30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding 100 mA may be connected to these outputs.
X0 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55 Connector X27 pin 5 X27 pin 24 X27 pin 6 X27 pin 25 X27 pin 7 X27 pin 26 X27 pin 8 X27 pin 27 X27 pin 9 X27 pin 28 X27 pin 10 X27 pin 29 X27 pin 11 X27 pin 30 X27 pin 12 X27 pin 31 X27 pin 14 X27 pin 33 X27 pin 15 X27 pin 34 Description Digital reconstruction 2nd tomographic speed set 3rd tomographic speed set Request for fluoro Exposure request Preparation request Digital preparation request Request for second snap to be taken 1st tomographic speed set 4th tomographic speed set 7 tomography angle set 20 tomography angle set 30 tomography angle set 45 tomography angle set Rays ON without request Man/auto fluoro Kv selection Angio steps Motion detection Recursive filter x0 / Collimator additional filter 2 mm Al Recursive filter x4 / Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al + 0.1 mm Cu Recursive filter x8 / Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al + 0.2 mm Cu
56
X27 pin 16
(Rev. 4)
8-1
APOLLO
The manual fluoro Kv control output is dependent on an analogical circuit (TLC271) with a range of voltages from 1.8 Vdc to 6.5 Vdc. It is possible to apply a maximum load of 5 mA.
X0 59 Connector X27 pin 19 Description Man. Fluoro Kv control analogue
The control outlets for the room monitor depend on an analogue circuit (TLC274) with a resistance range from 0 to 4.7 K. It is possible apply a max load of 3 W.
X0 61 62 Connector X28 pin 1 X28 pin 2 Description Mon. Brightness control analogue Mon. Contrast control analogue
The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that must be polarised. The maximum voltage and current applied must not exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.
X0 28 26 27 32 31 30 29 Connector X27 pin 3 X27 pin 4 X27 pin 22 X27 pin 1 X27 pin 20 X27 pin 2 X27 pin 21 Description Common for im. Scan reverse circuit Right/left image scan reverse Up/Down image scan reverse Common for Zoom I.I. circuit Maximum Zoom (minimum field) Medium zoom (medium field) Minimum Zoom (maximum field)
APOLLO
8-2
(Rev. 3)
8.2
Input signals towards the Apollo table

The inputs below depend on an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN active at 0 V. This circuit formed with 24Vdc-referred pull-up resistors. The typical absorption of these circuits is equal to 10 mA max.
X0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Connector X13 pin 1 X13 pin 2 X13 pin 3 X13 pin 4 X13 pin 5 X13 pin 6 X13 pin 7 X-ray on Digital work station Spot Film Device work station Ceiling stand safety (*) External safety barrier (*) Collimator additional filters out of position Description Generator ready for rays
(*) Jumpered to ground by default to disable the feature.
(Rev. 3)
8-3
APOLLO
APOLLO
8-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Configuration access and description of the data groups
CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS

All the data necessary for the configuration, operation and adjustment of the Apollo table, including the Checksum that is updated every time the data varies, are contained in the EEprom. When powering up, the data are compared, the Checksum of the data is verified again and it is compared with that currently in the EEprom. If there is no correspondence between the two pieces of data the alarm 090 is generated. The data contained on the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups". There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each of these groups. A storage position will therefore be configured with three figures of which:
0
Number of the group
00
Position of the cell
To access the read only function of the data contained in these cells it will be enough to position the switch of the group of dip-switches on the CPU at ON. In order to be able to edit, therefore write new data in the cells, as well as activating the switches, it will be necessary to key in an access code. In the table below the subdivisions of groups of data and their functions, the dip-switches to activate and the access codes to be keyed-in are listed. WARNING: The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these codes so that non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the memory cells and changing them, thereby causing the equipment to malfunction. The version of the installed software in the Eprom on the CPU is shown on the display for 3 seconds every time the machine is turned on:
Software rel. X.XX DD MM YY HH.MM

where: Row 1 = version of the software also shown on the label on the Eprom Row 2 = date and time of the compilation of the operating files.
(Rev. 3)
9-1
APOLLO
For any reporting of a malfunction or request for technical help, always indicate the version of the software on the equipment. The four access codes are :
C1 = 9006 C2 = 2573 C3 = 8425 C4 = 1541

The following table shows the dip switch combinations access code and the functions of the various groups.
Dip switch 1 2 3 4 1+2 1 1 2 2 3 + + + + + 3 4 3 4 4 Code C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C3 C3 C4 C4 Group 101 201 301 711 401 701 751 721 731 850 Subroutine Potmeter adjustment Installation data PDI controlled motor setting data time setting -Reset alarm memory Equipment dimension setting Run shutters and cassette Eeprom copying Alarm history visualisation Spot Film Device and table life test Remote service function Equipment cycles and time display and resetting
The above mentioned groups are divided into positions. The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below.
Group Potmeter adjustment Installation data PDI controlled motor setting data Time setting Reset alarm memory Position and function From 101 to 133 setting of the maximum and minimum of the various potmeters From 201 to 262 typical settings linked to the installation and the equipment From 301 to 400 setting data for control of motors with PDI function 711 = Time and date display 712 = Year setting 713 = Month setting 714 = Day setting 715 = Hour setting 716 = Minute setting 717 = Second setting 718 = Clock correction 719 = Reset alarm memory
APOLLO
9-2
(Rev. 3)
Group Equipment dimension setting Run shutters and cassette Eeprom copying
Position and function From 401 to 686 dimensions and run setting
701 = Copy from EEprom to Ram 702 = Copy from Ram to EEprom Alarm history visualisation Extended diagnosis (from 1 to 20) 751 = Position and alarm data display Spot Film Device part position and function display 753 = Joystick display 754 = Digital input display 755 = Digital output display Reduced diagnosis (from 21 to 100) 800 = Alarm data display (2 alarms) Spot Film Device and table life 721 = Life test choice test 722 = Spot Film Device life test (not available on "All Digital" version) 723 = Table life test Remote service function 731 = Remote service function Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display and resetting 851 = Time display 852 = Time display From 853 to 867 resetting cycles one field at a time
(Rev. 3)
9-3
APOLLO
APOLLO
9-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10
ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA

To access the data contained in group 100 the procedures described below must be followed. v
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 1 in the dip-switch assembly in the CPU PCB to ON. 2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
101
where: 101 (369) -40.0 2090/ Angulation
(369) -40.0 2090 / 4096 Angulation min (head side)

= number of the group and the position = value presently in the memory = position that the organ has to reach corresponding to the value at minimum = current value of the potmeters expressed on a scale with a maximum value of 4096 = brief description of the function of the selected cell.
The following will only be shown for the cells referring to the adjustment of collimator movements (from 117 to 122 included ):
117
where: 117 (492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090/ Collimator
(492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090 / 4096 Collimator width min (closed)

= = = = = number of the group and the position value presently in the memory current position of the SID position to reach current value of the potmeters expressed on a scale with a maximum value of 4096 = brief description of the function of the selected cell.
(Rev. 3)
10-1
APOLLO
WARNING: The SID value must be 980 mm (38.6") during adjustment. If the value is different when the MODE2 acceptance of storage to memory key is pressed, the value is not accepted in the memory and alarm "088 Wrong SID" will be shown on the display. The value of the position to reach varies as the SID varies so the SID value is only correct when it is 980 mm (38.6"). This value is the dimension that the ray field (and light field for the convenience of the measurement) must have at tabletop level. 3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As said beforehand, it is not possible in this phase to edit any setting or perform any movement. v
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has elapsed, the display will show:
002 0000 Key in access code

where: 002 = number of the position for the input of the access codes 0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9). 2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code. 3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the position for the inputting of the code.
APOLLO
10-2
(Rev. 3)
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm. If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the inputting of the last digit, the flashing CORR message disappears, what is written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data remains in the memory. However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time, the display will show the message:
Access to groups 101 301 401

that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400, thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in, in function of which switches are positioned at ON. If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied

In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2. 5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second. The display returns to the position of the group 100 abandoned on entry to position 002.
(Rev. 3)
10-3
APOLLO
10.1
Potmeter adjustment
As said before, the Apollo table bases the control of its movements on the feedback generated by the potmeters. These potmeters must therefore be adjusted, the reference value of the maximum and end run voltages must, that is to say, be stored in the corresponding cells in the EEprom. At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this group. It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of the potmeters by using the compressor movement joystick. In this program, only this joystick will be active (with the exception of the adjustment of the beam and middle beam movements and collimator as described further on) and the motor that is activated will depend on the cell that is set. If the joystick is pushed upwards, the direction of the set movement will be towards its maximum and the potmeter value shown on the display will increase. If the joystick is pushed downwards, the direction of the movement will be the opposite, towards its minimum, and the potmeter value will decrease. In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in the adjustment software and cannot be modified. To carry out the adjustment, and therefore memorise the new potmeter value, key MODE2 must be pressed. The display will show the following for three seconds:
**** ACCEPTED ****

to confirm that the memorisation has been successful. At the same time, the data in brackets at the side of the group number and position is updated with the new value. WARNING: During the adjustment phase, the anticollision program is not active so, before performing any movement, make sure that that there is not risk of collision during it. Furthermore, since the software end runs are set in this program no stopping on them is activated. If the set run is exceed, the movement will hit the emergency switch causing the equipment to stop.
APOLLO
10-4
(Rev. 3)
10.1.1
Cell data and list

The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's predelivery testing of the equipment. These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set. It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of group 400, but in practice this operation is never performed. In fact this modifies the functional characteristics of the table. Furthermore, in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where there is a malfunction in the movement electronics control, there are hardware emergency switches positioned in such a way as to cut in when the software end run does not stop the movement. These positions break the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of the K1L remote switch). Thus any modification of the run limits also entails the mechanical repositioning of these switches. In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown.
Cell Movement 101 Angulation 102 Angulation 103 Scan 104 Scan 105 Main beam 106 Main beam 107 Middle beam 108 Middle beam 111 Transversal tabletop 112 Transversal tabletop 113 SID 114 SID 117 Collimator width 118 Collimator width 119 Height collim. 120 Height collim. 121 Optional Iris collim. 122 Optional Iris collim. 123 Compressor 124 Compressor
(Rev. 3)
Joyst.direct. LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW/HIGH LOW/HIGH
Value min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max
Movement direction Anticlockwise (head end) Clockwise (feet side) Left (head end) Right (feet side) Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Inside Outside LOW HIGH Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Descent/Rise Descent/Rise
Default.lim -40.0 +40.0 -800 mm +800 mm 135 mm 683 mm 135 mm 740 mm -160 mm +160 mm 1016 mm 1516 mm Square 000 mm 490 mm 000 mm 490 mm N.A. N.A. Iris 000 mm 415 mm 000 mm 415 mm 85 mm 570 mm
00.0 kg 15.5 kg
APOLLO
10-5
Cell 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133
Movement Grid Grid Cassette close Cassette close Cross subdivision Cross subdivision Shutters Shutters Optional I.I. lift
Joyst.direct. LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW/HIGH
Value min max min max min max min max
Movement direction Park direction Field direction Closes Opens Left (head end) Right (feet side) Towards opening Towards overlap (cross subdiv.)
Default.Lim 000 mm 560 mm 146 mm 463 mm -65.0 mm +65.0 mm 000.0 mm 455.0 mm Switch high=ON Switch low=ON
min/max Descent/Rise
NOTE: Position 133 does not refer to a potmeter but is used for the adjustment of the switches of the end runs of the I.I. lift assembly when fitted. When one switch is active on the display the ON value is shown, while the other has the OFF value. As said before, the default value that the movement must reach at the minimum and maximum is shown on the display. Once this position has been reached, the potmeter must indicate a near value (a tolerance of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the following table. If not, release the potmeter, reach the position required with the movement then turn the potmeter until reaching the indicated value. Lock the potmeter in position and store the value to memory. Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potmeter is not damaged mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed its mechanical stop, and the potmeter is used in the central area, thus avoiding using the limits that often turn out to be critical. As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the minimum and maximum positions, it will be shown how to measure the value to reach, on the next few pages by means of pictures and descriptions. In some cases, this measurement is different from what is shown on the display, as shown in the last column of the proceeding table. This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations having table points of origin as a reference but, in some case, it is intricate and difficult to make these measurements in practice. This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been chosen to facilitate the calibration.
APOLLO
10-6
(Rev. 3)
Cell 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 111 112 113 114 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
Movement Angulation Angulation Scan Scan Main beam Main beam Middle beam Middle beam Transversal tabletop Transversal tabletop SID SID Collimator width Collimator width Height collim. Height collim. Optional Iris collim. Optional Iris collim. Compressor Compressor Grid Grid Cassette close Cassette close Cross subdivision Cross subdivision Shutters Shutters
Value min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max
Movement direction Anticlockwise (head end) Clockwise (feet side) Left (head end) Right (feet side) Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Inside Outside LOW HIGH Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Descent/Rise Descent/Rise Park direction Field direction Closes Opens Left (head end) Right (feet side) Towards opening Towards overlap (cross subdiv.)
Potmeter value approx.334 approx.3762 approx.117 approx.3979 approx.350 approx.3745 approx.360 approx.3735 approx.232 approx.3863 approx.341 approx.3754 approx.790 approx.3160 approx.880 approx.3050 approx.950 approx.3370 approx.1880 approx.3520 approx.205 approx.3710 approx.360 approx.3730 approx.1430 approx.2640 approx.330 approx.3740
(Rev. 3)
10-7
APOLLO
10.1.2
ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102)

To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the covers of the scan group. At this point, the Spot Film Device support plate can be seen showing the column tilting reference marks. The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of the column to correspond to reference lines on the Spot Film Device support. With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of the soundness of the min and max positions reached. Take the column towards the minimum (head side), select cell 101 and store to memory. Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell 102.
-40 +40
Reference marks
Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 102)
APOLLO
10-8
(Rev. 3)
10.1.3
SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104)

Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must: 1. Move the table into a horizontal position with the lift higher than the minimum position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over its full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the floor. 2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group. 3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover. Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be found between the outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of the Spot Film Device base plate. The point to be reached is 52 mm (2.0"). Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value. Move the carriage to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 1652 mm (65.0") measurement among the same references used for the minimum. Store the value in the cell 104.
1652mm (65.0")
52mm (2.0")
Figure 10-2: SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 104)

(Rev. 3)
10-9
APOLLO
10.1.4
MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment (cells 105 108)
When the main beam movement cells are select, as for all the other adjustments, the movement is enabled by the compressor joystick. Since just the main beam movement would make it impossible to reach some positions, it is possible also to activate the middle beam movement by means of the SID joystick. The movements cannot take place at the same time, but the activation of one excludes the other. To carry out the minimum main beam and middle beam adjustment, it is necessary to remove the II and, if a lift is present, bring the II attachment plate to the high position. Move the main beam in such a way that there is access to the verification of the middle beam position. Move the middle beam downwards until it ends up flat, while checking it with a bubble level (Figure 10-3); select cell 107 and memorise the minimum middle beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-3: Minimum middle beam position (cell 107)
APOLLO
10-10
(Rev. 3)
At this point bring the main beam downwards, in such a way as it ends up flat, while checking with a bubble level (Figure 10-4). Select cell 105 and memorise the minimum main beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105) At this point, take the main beam towards the maximum until it is perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right angles (Figure 10-5); select the cell 106 and store the maximum value to memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106)

(Rev. 3)
10-11
APOLLO
WARNING: In the main beam and middle beam adjustment phase, there are risks that could damage the equipment very seriously. In fact the combination of the main beam and middle beam movements carried out incorrectly could cause a collision between the structure of the main beam and the structure of the middle beam or a collision between the main beam motor tube and the structure of the middle beam. While in the first case the main beam-middle beam collision safety switch protects the equipment, in the second a manoeuvring error would cause irreparable damage to the main beam motor tube by bending it. It is therefore fundamental, in addition to paying the utmost attention before and during the activation of the movements, to follow the instructions below to the letter. At this point take the main beam towards the bottom until the extension of the mechanical tube reaches 430 mm (16.9") (Figure 10-6) to be measured between the extreme limit of the actuator and the upper edge of the outside tube of the actuator.
430mm (16.9")
Figure 10-6
APOLLO
10-12
(Rev. 3)
Select cell 108 and take the middle beam towards the maximum until it is perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right angles; at this point store the maximum value to memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-7: Maximum middle beam position (cell 108)
(Rev. 3)
10-13
APOLLO
10.1.5
TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 112)

Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover. Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be measured between the aluminium tabletop support arm fixing block and the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement tube. The distance to be reached is 270 mm (10.6"). Select the cell 111 and memorise the minimum value. Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 590 mm (23.2") measurement between the same references used for the minimum. Store the value 112 in the cell.
270mm (10.6")
590mm (23.2")
Figure 10-8: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 112)
APOLLO
10-14
(Rev. 3)
10.1.6
SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 114)

Remove the rear SID cover. Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is 42 mm (1.6"). Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value. Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the 542 mm (21.3") measurement between the same references used for the minimum. Store the value in cell 114.
542mm 42mm (21.3") (1.6")
Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 114)
(Rev. 3)
10-15
APOLLO
10.1.7
WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 118)

The WIDTH limitation of the collimator means the limitation corresponding to the right and left of the patient. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display). Select cell 117 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that must be stored in position 118.
NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted" will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
Focus
980mm (38.6")
min = cell 117 max = cell 118
Figure 10-10: COLLIMATOR WIDTH potmeter adjustment (cells 117 118)
APOLLO
10-16
(Rev. 3)
10.1.8
HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 120)

The HEIGHT limitation of the collimator means the limitation corresponding to the head and feet of the patient. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display. Select cell 119 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum, that must be stored in position 120.
NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
Focus
Figure 10-11: HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 120)
(Rev. 3)
980mm (38.6") min = cell 119 max = cell 120
10-17
APOLLO
10.1.9
IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment (cells 121 122)

Iris potmeters will only be adjusted if the table is fitted with collimator to limit the square-rectangular and circular fields. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display). Select cell 121 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that must be stored in position 122.
NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
Focus
Figure 10-12: IRIS COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 121 122)
APOLLO
980mm (38.6") min = cell 121 max = cell 122
10-18
(Rev. 3)
10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 124)

To perform this adjustment a compression dynamometer with a range of 0 to 20 kg (0 to 44.1 lbs) is required. Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on it. The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store the value in position 123. Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) as shown on the dynamometer is exerted; store the value in position 124.
(Rev. 3)
10-19
APOLLO
10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126)

Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device. Move the grid holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that must be found between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line notch on the upper edge of the shoulders. The point to be reached is 460 mm (18.1"). Select cell 125 and memorise the minimum value. Move the small frame to the maximum position (field) and find the 50 mm (1.9") measurement among the same references used for the minimum. Store the value in cell 126.
460mm (18.1") 50mm (1.9")
Grid centre (park position) Centre line notch Grid centre (field position)
Figure 10-13: GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 126)
APOLLO
10-20
(Rev. 3)
10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 128)

Remove the upper lid of the Spot Film Device. Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette close guides are fully closed and the gripping switch is not activated. Store the value. Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required measurement indicated on the display is achieved. Store the value. WARNING: The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potmeter must be carried out with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision perfectly centred. When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to ensure the guides do not violently strike the walls of the Spot Film Device but just brush them slightly. Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the Spot Film Device PCB A4.
(Rev. 3)
10-21
APOLLO
10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment The gripping switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the cassette and the driving belts. This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette guides of approximately 6 kg (13.2 lbs). Insert a cassette with height side 24 cm (10") to make visible the reference scale when the switch is activated. To comply with this value, the scale on the cam must coincide with the position 40 10 to be read from the graded scale on the volute.
Graded scale
Reference scale
Figure 10-14: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping system: 1. Move the table into a vertical position. 2. Insert a 35x43 (14"x17") cassette (35/14" height side direction) resting it on the lower guide.
G
APOLLO
NOTE: The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped with. This is because the check must be done under the worst operating conditions (maximum weight in the lifting mode). If the 35x43 (14"x17") size is not used, perform the test with the heaviest format among those which are in use. 10-22
(Rev. 3)
3. Operate the cassette insertion control. If the adjustment is correct, the switch must never cut in while the cassette is moving upwards until both the guides are touching the cassette and an approximately 10 movement scale movement seen on the graded scale has been performed. If this is not the case, work on the switch activating cam to bring its intervention forward or delay it. WARNING: An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 kg / 11.0 lbs) causes the switch to cut in early during the test described above. An adjustment that is too high (> 7 kg / 15.4 lbs) causes pressure that is to great between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has difficulty moving.
(Rev. 3)
10-23
APOLLO
10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130)

Insert a cassette between the guides with height side 24 cm (10") on which there is a centre line and grip it. Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of the cassette is 65 mm (2.6") away from the centre of the cassette resting surface; store the value. Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction with respect to the centre line; store the value.
Figure 10-15: CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 130)
APOLLO
10-24
(Rev. 3)
10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 132)

Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device. Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that corresponds with an opening equal to 475 mm (18.7") (Figure 10-16); select cell 131 and memorise the minimum value.
475mm (18.7")
Figure 10-16: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 131) Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read the measurement of 9 mm (0.3") (Figure 10-17); store the value in cell 132.
9mm (0.3")
Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 132)

(Rev. 3)
10-25
APOLLO
10.1.15 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133)

Check that: measuring chamber is removed grid in park position cassettes jaws completely open. By the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to lower end run. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam (switch S29). Move the I.I. lift to the upper end limit (switch S28). Check that during the movement does not happens any collision between I.I. and internal SFD parts. The cams for end run microswitches position can be modified to obtain: minimum distance between skin and I.I. the coincidence between input I.I. plain and film level to avoid parallax error due by oblique projections.
APOLLO
10-26
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11
ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)

To access the reading of the data contained in the various groups (except for group 100) the following procedure must be followed. v
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, position the switch or switches of the dip-switch group on the CPU PCB, relating to the data group for which access is required, at ON. 2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
XXX YYYYYY Description of the cell set

where: XXX YYYYYY = number of the group and the position = value currently in the memory.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As said previously, it is not possible to modify any settings.
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has elapsed, the display will show:
002 0000 Key in access code

where: 002 0000 = number of the position for the input of the access codes = position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.
(Rev. 3)
11-1
APOLLO
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the position for the inputting of the code. 4. Press key MODE2 to confirm. If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the inputting of the last digit, the flashing CORR message disappears, what is written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data remains in the memory. However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time, the display will show the message:
Access to groups XXX YYY - ZZZ

that indicates that it is possible to access groups, thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in, to the relative groups in function of which switches are positioned at ON. If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied

In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2. 5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second. The display returns to the position of the group abandoned on entry to position 002. At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this group. To modify the data, press the MODE2 key, the flashing message CORR will appear on the display. By using the numeric keys key in the data required and press the MODE2 key again within 15 sec. to confirm the correction.
APOLLO
11-2
(Rev. 3)
11.1
Group 200 Installation data

The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment. Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells. To ensure the installation functions properly the correct values must be input.
11.1.1
Function of the parameters of group 200

As the data contained in the cells of this group can be modified to render the machine fit for the installation requirements, the default data set during the table adjustment in the factory is shown in the second to last column in the table. The last column is for the service technician to take note any variations from the default data.
(Rev. 3)
11-3
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-4
(Rev. 3)
Cell 201
Display Left wall - table center distance
Function description The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included in this data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop measured when flat. The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be included in this data. The table centre corresponds with the centre of the tabletop measured when flat. Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind the lowest point in the movement of the X-ray tube. The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the floor that the X-ray tube can reach. The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the ceiling that each component of the table can reach. The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced from the left and right walls that each element of the table can reach. This data determines the minimum distance that the II will be able to reach from the floor. The ascent band is ideally positioned over the value stored in cell 207. During tilting, when one side of the II enters this band, the movement is modified with respect to the way it operates normally to ensure the II gets out of the ascent band preventing it from reaching the safety zone (cell 207) by causing the machine to stop. The size measured between the upper surface of the II (input screen zone) and the more distant lower part (TV camera coverage zone or angulation motor cover in case of 9 I.I.) The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the television camera radius must be input).
Unit mm
Default -3000
Setting
202
Right wall table center distance
mm
3000
203 204 205 206 207 208
Floor - ceiling distance Floor-tube safety distance Ceiling safety distance Walls safety distance II-floor safety distance The ascend band II-floor collision
mm mm mm mm mm mm
3000 200 200 200 100 60
209
I.I. vertical dimension
mm
600
210
I.I. bottom half size
mm
250
(Rev. 3)
11-5
APOLLO
Cell 211
Display Tube equivalent radius at 0
Function description The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Remember however that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm (13.4") from the tube attachment shaft, the minimum data that can be put in is 340 mm (13.4").
Unit mm
Default 340
Setting
212
Casing/collimator eq. radius if not at The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured 0 between the tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tubecollimator assembly. Typically the point corresponds with the collimator sharp edge furthest from the shaft. Focus - tube shaft distance I.I. minimum field I.I. medium field I.I. max field Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing pin. Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum enlargement). Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium enlargement). Insert the rated value of the I.I. rated field in the case of a three-field intensifier. If a four-field II is installed the field value must be input with minimum enlargement. This data is only used by the software when cell 252 is set at 1 (four-field II). In this case insert the value of the nominal II field. This data makes it possible to modify the opening of the collimator in the radiography collimations. It has no influence on the opening of the minimum, of the maximum and on the II formats.
mm
350
213 214 215 216
mm mm mm mm
0 158 250 312
217 218
I.I. max field for 4 fields Width-height collimator format correct
mm mm
410 0
219
Cassette exposure position correction If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of the same number, the correction value required must be input into this cell. 0 MAX position distance by grid This data makes it possible to centre the grid on the rays perfectly. The data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter maximum and the 0 grid position.
mm
220
mm
50
APOLLO
11-6
(Rev. 3)
Cell 221
Display Park MIN distance by grid
Function description This data makes it possible to position the grid properly in the park. The data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter minimum and the grid parking position. Since the grid performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in this cell makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation. Since the grid oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total oscillation has a value that is equal to double the half run calculated from the 0 point. This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid with X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and it is advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between X-ray request and the response. The dead band is the "the window" around the set point, that once reached turns off the movement. The smaller this value is, the more precise the positioning with relation to the end runs (min, max and centering) but the risk of movement oscillations increases around the set point when the stop is requested. A compromise value must be inserted between these two effects to optimise the movement of the transversal tabletop. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement at the min and the max. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the compression force, set by means of the control panel keys, when applied to the patient.
Unit mm
Default 10
Setting
222
Total grid oscillation length
mm
20
223
Exposure delay after grid start
sec.
0.00
224
Transversal tabletop dead band
mm
225
SID dead band
mm
226
Compression force dead band
kg
0.5
(Rev. 3)
11-7
APOLLO
Cell 227
Display Grid dead band
Function description See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid movement at the min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide movement only at the maximum opening. This data must be input with maximum care because too small a value will determine a collision between the guides and the walls of the Spot Film Device risking a breakage of the motor protection fuse while too great a value will make the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. The value to insert in this cell shall be active for the movement of the base axis of the collimator for all the automatic collimation positions on cassette sizes, on II sizes and at the min and the max. The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the height collimation axis. The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the iris collimation axis. The slow down band is positioned around the dead band of collimator width axis. This data determines the change of movement speed of the movement in the axis before the dead band is reached. Thanks to this slowing down (implemented by a hardware circuit) it will be possible to set very small dead bands (thereby enhancing position precision) thereby avoiding oscillations caused by speed of high positions. The data to be inserted in this cell is therefore intimately bound to the data of the dead band.
Unit mm
Default 2
Setting
228
Gripping dead band
mm
229
Width collimator dead band
mm
230 231 232
Collimator height dead band Iris collimator dead band Width collimator slow down band
mm mm mm
2 2 15
APOLLO
11-8
(Rev. 3)
Cell 233 234 235
Display Height collimator slow down band Iris collimator slow down band Transversal tabletop average speed
Function description The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an on/off movement with potmeter feedback only for position monitoring, the logic is not able to correct the speed. It will therefore be possible for the logic to monitor an excessive position error caused by a mechanical defect (movement /potmeter coupling etc.). To recognise such an error however the logic must know the average speed of the tabletop movement in all its conditions. The average value of this speed must be inserted in this cell after having calculated it as described in cell 262. What is described for cell 235 applies. This value sets the SID position automatically readed when the Tomography function is completed. If the table is used for stepping angiograph tests, the data inserted in this cell determines the height of the tabletop for m the ground when the stepping angio mode entrance procedure is finished. The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected. However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next, that helps in the reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage, it is necessary for the length of the step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. The length of the step can be reduced in percentage terms through the data that is placed in this cell. This datum define the table height increment from the floor in comparison with the minimum position, when tilt or centre joystick are activated. With datum 0 the table height is the same when horizontal position is reached by acting tilt or lift down joystick.
Unit mm mm mm/s
Default 15 15 54
Setting
236 237 238
SID average speed SID height after tomo Angio table lift default position
mm/s cm mm
25 100 1100
239
II diam percentage per angio step
90
240
Min height with tilt joystick
mm
(Rev. 3)
11-9
APOLLO
Cell 241
Display Shutters corr. pos. for fluoro reduction
Function description This setting is used to correct the shutters position from the width collimator when a reduction by joystick is activated. This correction is not present on: I.I. size cassettes subdivision. Dependent on the TV chain installed on the table or at the presence of a collimator with motorised additional filters selection and the requirements of the operators, it is possible to configure the dedicated key function and the relative outputs. There are five functions: 0 = disabled function 1= filter display (CCDx0 CCDx2 CCDx4 CCDx8). Activation of the three relative outputs. 2 = mode display (pulsed continuous). Activation of the output corresponding to CCDx0 when pulsed is displayed 3 = ROI display (large small). Activation of the output corresponding to CCDx0 when "large" is displayed. 4 = collimator additional filters visualisation (+0 - +1Al - +0.1Cu +0.2Cu). Activation of the three relative outputs.
Unit mm
Default 0
Setting
246
0=disab 1=filters 2=puls 3=zone 4=f.coll
247
0=I - 1=GB - 2=F - 3=E - 4=D 5=RU
Depending on the country where the system is installed, it is possible to choose what language the messages will be displayed in. This applies to all the messages that are displayed during the regular operation of the equipment. With regard to the display of the service programs (functions that can be accessed through the dip-switches) there are two languages: Italian with selection = 0, English for all the other selections.
APOLLO
11-10
(Rev. 3)
The cells in group 200 after those already listed are used to make the setting choices and not introduce numerical data like the previous ones. In these fields a choice is requested between values 0 or 1 to establish the setting choice. Do the following to modify the input data: 1. Press the MODE2 key to enable the correction. The display will show the flashing message CORR. 2. Press key F3. The data present is automatically replaced with the alternative. After this operation, the writing CORR disappears and the data is confirmed in EEprom.
(Rev. 3)
11-11
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-12
(Rev. 3)
Cell 250
Display 0 = no 1 = yes Collimator hold mode default
Function description This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or each time the "automatic collimator" mode is selected, the Hold function is active by default or whether it must be activated by the operator by pushing the relative key. This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions. 0=
1 3 2 4
Default 0
Setting
251
0=foot-head 1=head-foot Cross subdivision sequence
4 2
252 253 0=3 fields 1=4 II fields I.I. field selection 0 = no 1 = yes Iris collimator 0 = no 1 = yes Anti entrapment device
1=
The data depends on the II installed. Typically the 4 field selection is for 16 II. This depends on the configuration of the table configuration that can make provision for a collimator with square/rectangular filed or square/rectangular field with iris. The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety device to prevent the entrapment of parts between internal tabletop profiles and SFD rear side and between column and SFD lateral side. If this circuit is installed it will be necessary to activate the relative input software control using this setting. The C-CSA-US versions are always equipped with this circuit. As an option, the table can be fitted with an II lift device to bring it towards the tabletop in digital fluoroscopic mode (dependent on the setting of cell 256). When this option is present the value must be 0. All Digital version does not carry I.I. lift.
0 0
254
255
0=pres. 1=abs. I.I. lift
(Rev. 3)
11-13
APOLLO
Cell 256
Display 0 = no 1 = yes I.I. lift go up in fluoro
Function description If the I.I. lift option is present (cell 255) the II is always brought towards the table when the digital mode is selected. The value to be keyed in this cell determines whether the approach also occurs when the fluoro is requested. The mode enhances the quality of the image but delays the fluoro-exposure passage time. The selection depends on the cassettes that are available. Depending on the room where the table is installed, the "vertical position" can be on the right or left side. The angulation motor will be mounted on the left side when the vertical position will be on the right side and viceversa. Selecting 0 (vertical on the right Trendelenbourg on the left) the display will show positive angles when tilting to the right. The scanning will have a run limited to 350 mm (13.8") from the centre instead of 800 mm (31.5") when the tilting angle is between 5 and 80. Selecting 1, the above will be reversed. The setting of this parameter must always be consistent with the angulation motor. If this setting is not consistent the motor will hit the floor during tilting with the scanning close to its range limit. Dependent on the type of TV chain installed, it might be necessary to activate the horizontal image scan reverse output by default. Selection 0 determines that when the table is turned on both the dedicated key led and the relative output are Off. By pressing the key the led is turned on and the output is activated. When the table is on, selection 1 determines the automatic activation of the output with the led of the relative key off. When the horizontal image scan reverse key is pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.
Default 0
Setting
257 258
0 = cm 1 = inch Cassette type 0 = right side 1 = left side Table vertical position
0 0
259
0=off-off 1=off-on Horizontal image scan reverse
APOLLO
11-14
(Rev. 4)
Cell 260 261
Display 0=off-off 1=off-on Vertical image scan reverse 0=enable 1=disable Spot Film Device disabling To be set at 1 in "All Digital" version
Function description What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image scan reverse function. It disables the Spot Film Device controls. The initialisation functions and all the relative modes are no longer performed. This override is present when the table is in the All digital version. This can be activated if the Spot Film Device breaks down to exclude alarms and any disabling.
Default 0 0
Setting
262
0=normal 1=Technical service function In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated. The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE FUNCTION ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be used for service and control operations. Display of the instant speeds By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is visualised thanks to the potmeter feedback. The speed in all load conditions and position of the equipment must be checked, the various values noted and the average obtained. The values that can be obtained in this way must be inserted in cell 235 for transversal tabletop and 236 for the SID. The measurement of the speeds only must to be done if the movement potmeters have already been adjusted. Otherwise the value shown is not real. Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the Spot Film Device shutters The collimator and the Spot Film Device shutters do not perform the limitation on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and measurements to be made on the Spot Film Device or the exposed films.
(Rev. 3)
11-15
APOLLO
Cell 263 264 265
Display 0=high high 1=high -low 0=right-right 1=right left 0=cmkg 1=inch-lbs Parameters visualization
Function description It reverses the image on the monitor high-low when the function monitor orienting is selected. It reverses the image on the monitor right-left high-low when the function monitor orienting is selected. Sets the SID, layer and compression force data visualization in cm-kg or inch-lbs.
Default 0 0 0
Setting
APOLLO
11-16
(Rev. 4)
11.2
Group 300 PDI controlled motor data

This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors controlled using the PDI (proportional, derived, integral) method. Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells. This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment. Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to understand its meaning, its function and the possible consequences, thoroughly. The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the function of the various cells present for each of the motors controlled using this system.
11.2.1
Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control

To move an axis, the control software must know: the departure point of the movement the point of arrival. The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in which the axis is. The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is selected. To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a trajectory. This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells containing the speed and acceleration values. To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to carry out two separate functions: the generation of the trajectory following the trajectory.
Generation of the trajectory The software constructs a variable that represents the point where the movement should be moment by moment. This variable is called the theoretical trajectory. Having the departure point as the origin, the generation of the theoretical trajectory consists of: a ramp, i.e. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly a stretch of constant speed a deceleration ramp with acceleration equal to the acceleration ramp but with a negative sign. The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the theoretical trajectory are those inserted in the relative cells.
(Rev. 3)
11-17
APOLLO
Following the trajectory The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that generates the real trajectory. This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref), sent to the activation that controls the axis motor. This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the theoretical trajectory as closely as possible. This variable is the sum of three components: Proportional The proportional part is product of the multiplication:
"instantaneous error" X "proportional gain"

where: the instantaneous error is given by the difference between the real position (monitored by the feed back of the potmeter or encoder) and that theoretical (calculated by the generation of the trajectory) the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
Integral The integral part is product of the multiplication:
"sum of the errors" X "integral gain"

where: the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted every millisecond that calculates the positioning error between the real trajectory and the theoretical one. The error can take a negative and positive value according to whether the real trajectory is before or after the theoretical one. The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic, that is to say, it will take the error's negative or positive sign into account. The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is accumulated during the accomplishment of the whole trajectory. the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
APOLLO
11-18
(Rev. 3)
Derivative The derivative part is the product of the multiplication:
"error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain"

where: the error difference between samplings, is calculated on the basis of an interval time that must be set in the dedicated cell. This interval expressed in msec. is called "derivative sampling period". The position error, i.e. the difference between the real and the theoretical trajectories, is calculated at each sampling. The difference between the error detected in a sampling and the error detected in the next sampling shows the extent to which the actual trajectory has changed its position with respect to the theoretical one. the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell. So far the following fields have been analysed: Proportional gain Integral gain Period of derivative sampling Derivative gain Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the control of a PDI axis.
Integration limit This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors can assume. If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell, it will be limited in accordance with the limit set. If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed. This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the sum assumes values that are considerable. Motor STOP error When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position of a movement reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell, the movement will be stopped.
(Rev. 3)
11-19
APOLLO
Delay motor turning off This delay is the time after which, at the end of the run, the motor is turned off. This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as opposed to a theoretical one. This allows the integral action to complete its function. By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped. Braking time This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the acceleration ramp. The time inserted into these cells is equal to the time the motion employs to pass from the actual speed to 0 in a linear way. This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect to the theoretical one. In this case, the integral position recovery actions are not carried out and the motor turning off delay does not have effect. This braking modality is used for the following movements: main beam, middle beam, scan and angulation.
APOLLO
11-20
(Rev. 3)
11.2.2
Motors check data function

The following tables, divided by motor, contain the data relative to the various PDI-controlled motors.
Angulation movement
Cell 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit () 1st (/sec) joystick and tomo speed 2nd (/sec) tomo speed 3rd (/sec) tomo speed 4th (/sec) tomo speed 1st (/sec) joystick and tomo acceleration 2nd (/sec) tomo acceleration 3rd (/sec) tomo acceleration 4th (/sec) tomo acceleration Error stop motor () Braking time (sec) Default 0.001 200 0 200 20 11.1 15.0 19.0 23.0 25.0 33.0 42.0 50.0 5 0.5 Set
Scan movement
Cell 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 332 Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Joystick initial speed (mm/sec) Joystick final speed (mm/sec) Angio step speed (mm/sec) Angio return speed (mm/sec) Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2) Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2) Joystick speed increment (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Braking time (sec) Default 0.001 600 0 800 20 5 150 300 300 250 300 30 100 0.5 Set
(Rev. 4)
11-21
APOLLO
Main beam and middle beam movement (tilting and lift)

Cell 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 349
(*)
Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit Low tilting speed (/sec) High tilting speed (/sec) Lift manual speed (mm/sec) Slow tilting speed acceleration (/sec2) High tilting speed acceleration (/sec2) Lift acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Braking time (sec)
Default 0.001 (*) (*) (*) 10 (*) 6.0 25 (*) 6.0 70 80 0.4
Set
The data inserted into the cells can be with different values in function of the mechanical characteristics of the unit. As default data can be set 3 different groups: Cell 336 337 338 340 343 Group 1 600 10 400 4.5 4.0 Group 2 500 7 350 4.2 3.8 Group 3 400 5 300 4.0 3.5
Shutters movement
Cell 353 354 355 356 357 358 360 361 362 363 364 Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Initialisation speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.001 2000 50 3000 50.0 100.0 300.0 100.0 1200.0 100 0.50 Set
APOLLO
11-22
(Rev. 3)
Cassette movement
Cell 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Access speed (until cassette size photosens.) (mm/sec) IN-OUT speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.001 2000 50 4000 50.0 600.0 400.0 950.0 300.0 8000 200 0.50 Set
Cross subdivision movement

Cell 389 390 391 392 393 395 396 397 398 399 400 Function Period derivative sampl. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit Initialisation speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.001 1100 50 2500 10.0 30.0 90.0 12.0 2000.0 25.0 0.50 Set
(Rev. 3)
11-23
APOLLO
11.3
Group 400 / 500 / 600 Dimensions and runs

This group contains data that have various functions. The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided by groups.
11.3.1
Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback

As explained in the chapter about potmeters adjustment, the limit to reach for the calibration is shown on the display. This limit is set in this block of data. To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement run range. This will entail: the variation of the equipment specification the adjustment of the potmeter minimum and maximum calibration the adjustment of the emergency switches position. Moreover, it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can sustain such variation. The software will divide the new run range by the number of potmeter's points that are going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum value of the new run. WARNING: Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative characteristic of the equipment.
APOLLO
11-24
(Rev. 3)
Cell 401 402 403 404 405 407 409
View Angulation: minimum position Angulation: maximum position Scan: minimum position Scan: maximum position Main beam: minimum position Middle beam: minimum position Maximum Trendelembourg position
Function description Software minimum end of run position for angulation movement Software maximum end of run position for angulation movement Software minimum scan position for angulation movement Software maximum scan position for angulation movement Software minimum main beam position for angulation movement Software minimum end of run position for middle beam movement The main beam and middle beam potmeters adjustment determines the minimum Trendelembourg position equal to 90. It might be necessary to modify such limit to increase the comfort for the patient or to limit the tilting range. Data selectable is between 20 and 90; if data sets is between 87 and 90, the display will shows, when end limit is reached, alwais 90. For all the others selections, due to the stop dead band, the value displayed at the end limit could be different then the stored one. It holds the same as for cell 409 with the difference that this value has an influence on the vertical position with positive tilting angles. Software minimum end of run position for tabletop movement Software maximum end of run position for tabletop movement Software maximum end of run position for SID movement
Unit mm mm mm mm
Default -40.0 40.0 -800 800 135 135 -88
Setting
410 411 412 413 414
Maximum vertical position Transv. tabletop: minimum position Transv. tabletop: maximum position Tube shaft - film dist.: max position
mm mm mm mm
88 -160 160 1016 1516
Tube shaft - film dist.: minimum pos. Software minimum end of run position for SID movement
(Rev. 4)
11-25
APOLLO
Cell 415
View Minimum main beam forced setting
Function description
Unit
Default (XXX)
Setting
416
417 418 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432
In this cell is it is possible to force-set the minimum value of the main beam movement potmeter. This avoids removing the I.I. to perform the calibration. To correctly perform this calibration procedure, it will be necessary to calculate the data to input by checking the difference between the previously stored minimum and maximum values and the value corresponding to the maximum of the new calibration. The same previous difference between the two values shall be applied. Example: previous Mx = 3600 min = 500 difference = 3100 New max value = 3450 new val to input = 350 obtained applying the 3100 difference to the new max value. Maximum main beam forced setting In this cell is it is possible to set manually the maximum value of the main beam movement potmeter, in the case that it is not possible to reach the normal maximum position due to limitations of the room. Calibration is similar to what described in cell 415. Minimum middle beam forced setting It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 415) Maximum middle beam forced It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 416) setting Compression force: minimum Software minimum end of run position for compression force Compression force: maximum Software maximum end of run position for compression force Grid: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement Grid: maximum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement Gripping: minimum size Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement Gripping: maximum size Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement Cross subdivision: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement Cross subdivision: maximum Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement position Shutters: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement Shutters: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement
(XXX)
(XXX) (XXX) kg kg mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 01.5 15.5 000 510 146 463 -65.0 65.0 0.0 495.0
APOLLO
11-26
(Rev. 3)
11.3.2
Equipment mechanical dimensions

This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of this equipment. The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the various functions' management algorithms (anti-collision, tomography, lifting and tilting functions, etc.). WARNING: These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should never be modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment functioning.
(Rev. 3)
11-27
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-28
(Rev. 3)
Cell 433
View Dist. tube shaft-angulation shaft (SID=1000) Distance vert. main beam shaft I.I. sensor Distance main beam shaft - main beam left side distance Distance main beam shaft - main beam right side distance Dist. vert. main beam shaft - upper main beam Distance curved tabletop film Distance flat tabletop film Distance main beam shaft angulation shaft Dist. I.I.-film (lift.up)
Function description It refers to the distance between the mount shaft of the right tube and the rotation pin of the column. This data must be input with the SID on the minimum. It is used to calculate the collision. It is the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin and the input I.I. sensor. The value is used to calculate the collision. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam left limit. The value is used to calculate the collision. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam right limit. The value is used to calculate the collision. It refers to the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam upper limit. It is the distance between the tabletop and the film. The data is used to calculate the layer in the tomo modality. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the column rotation pin. The value is used to calculate the collision. This value is used only in the presence of the I.I. lift and it is the distance between the film and the I.I. sensor when the lift is in the upper position. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan run for inclined projections and for the tomography. This value is used both in the presence of the I.I. lift and for fixed I.I. equipment and it represents the distance between the film and the I.I. sensor. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan run for inclined projections and tomography. It is the distance between the film and the shutters inside the Spot Film Device. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.
Unit mm
Default 1016
Setting
434 435 436 437 438 439 441
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
83 500 1920 206 64 82 64 -19 (see NOTE) 18 (see NOTE) 12
442
Dist. I.I.-film (fixed or lift.down)
mm
443 NOTE:
Distance film - shutters
mm
These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.I.. The correct value will ensure the correspondence between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections.
(Rev. 3)
11-29
APOLLO
Cell 444
View Distance park - cass. size photosens.
Function description The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and the cassette size photosensor. It is used to correctly position the cassette in the parking position. It is the distance on the vertical axis between the middle beam mount shaft and the floor. The value is used to calculate the collision. It is the distance between the base-middle beam and main beam-middle beam mount shafts. The value is used to calculate the collision.
Unit mm
Default 472
Setting
445 446
Distance vert. middle beam shaft floor Distance between the middle beam shafts
mm mm
605 1420
APOLLO
11-30
(Rev. 3)
11.3.3
Data relative to single fault potmeter controls

This block of data is used to check the potmeters and the functions linked to single faults. A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.
(Rev. 3)
11-31
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-32
(Rev. 3)
Cell 447
View Max error for transversal tabletop
Function description The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal tabletop movement (see paragraph 11.1.1). As the real speed will never be identical to the stored speed, during the movement, an error will indicate the discrepancy between the real and the theoretical position. This error will be reset once the movement is stopped. If the error takes on a value equal to the one stored in this cell, alarm 218 is issued. It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement. With respect to the SID movement, the average speed is stored in cell 236 and in case the error value is reached, alarm 220 will be displayed.
Unit mm
Default 200
Setting
448
Max error for SID
mm
200
449
Max error for stopped potmeters
n/4096 The processor checks that the movements' potmeters do not undergo variations if the same movements are not active. This is done in order to guarantee the Single Fault safety. The number to store in this cell must take into account possible movements caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement arrest. The measurement unit is expressed in "potmeter points", in other words, a value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion. The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request prior to the processor displaying the alarm. For potentially "dangerous" movements potmeters, a cell is available for each movement (see following cells). In this cell the collimator, Spot Film Device and compressor movements potmeters are checked.
300
(Rev. 3)
11-33
APOLLO
Cell 450
View Extra-run max pot. out of SW range
Function description
Unit
Default 50
Setting
451
Max time of joyst. not
452
Max error for stopped
453 454 455 456 457 459
Max error for stopped Max error for stopped pot. Max error for stopped middle beam pot. Max error for stopped transversal tabletop pot. Max error for pot. SID stopped Cross subdivision displacement (head side)
This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potmeter can carry out n/4096 in proximity of the software range without generating an alarm. This extra run can be caused, for instance, by dead bands. If the potmeter exceeds, during the extra run, the value set in this cell, an alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potmeter to the limits. All this permits to detect if the potmeter circuit is interrupted when powering on. sec corresp. - S.F. It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the activation and single faults circuits. The time value set in this cell, with measuring unit expressed in sec., is equal to the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or 232) in case there is no correspondence between the activation and single fault circuits. angulation pot. It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. The value is expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary movement allowed without generating an alarm. scan pot. See cell 452 applied to the scan movement. mm main beam See cell 452 applied to the main beam movement. mm See cell 452 applied to the middle beam movement. See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement. See cell 452 applied to the SID movement. The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the cross subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with respect to the central position. It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet side. mm mm mm mm
5.00
1.0
15 15 15 15 15 -60.0
460
Cross subdivision displacement (feet side)
mm
60.0
APOLLO
11-34
(Rev. 3)
11.3.4
Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run

This block contains the runs carried out by the Spot Film Device cassette and shutters to perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the relative limitation. In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not perfect, it is possible to modify these values, by following closely the instructions reported in the dedicated chapter.
NOTE: The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the measure in the relative cell because of the mechanical inertia of the system. In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an increment and decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of the correction. For rapid consultation and interpretation, the runs and the relative cells are summed up in tables where the first number indicates the cell number and the second, in brackets, the stored data in mm.
(Rev. 3)
11-35
APOLLO
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side, when the same is in the parking position, with respect to centre of the Spot Film Device. Such distance is divided into 2 parts: the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the Spot Film Device (227 mm / 8.9") the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of the Spot Film Device (484 mm / 19.0") The 484 mm (19.0") figure is such as the distance of the photosensor from the bottom of the Spot Film Device (cell 444) is 472 mm (18.6") but the cassette parking position is set by the SW at: 5 mm (0.2") from the bottom at the end of cassette insertion 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom when caming back from a preparation or test run
NOTE: Distances given in the tables an stored in the cells are referred to a parking position of the cassette at 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom of the Spot Film Device. The correction, when the parking position is at 5 mm (0.2") from the bottom, is carried out automatically by the software which increases the distances in the table of 15 mm (0.6"). Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell 219) to compensate the differences due to manufacturing or operating characteristics. This offset will permit to modify all runs of all subdivisions of the stored quantity. The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows: Full size C = (cassette width / 2) 711 where 711 = 227 + 484 Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross C = full size run +/- (film / 4)

Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross C = full size run +/- (film / 3) Subdivision 4 in line C = full size run +/- (3/8 film) and (1/8 film)
APOLLO
11-36
(Rev. 3)
Table cassette run for cassettes in cm

13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35
PAN 461
(600.8)
462
(576.0)
463
(576.0)
466
(547.0)
466
(547.0)
469
(547.0)
472
(516.5)
478
(516.5)
463
(575.0)
512
(450.7)
531
(590.5)
532
(466.5)
518
(565.0)
521
(467.0)
478
(516.5)
500
(489.3)
484
(517.0)
490
(467.0)
500
(489.0)
506
(489.3)
512
(451.3)
464 SUBDIV. 2 L
(531.0)
467
(486.5)
467
(486.5)
470
(490.0)
473
(442.0)
479
(441.5)
513
(343.5)
533
(367.0)
519
(517.5)
522
(367.0)
479
(441.5)
501
(400.0)
485
(442.5)
491
(367.5)
501
(400.0)
507
(400.0)
513
(342.5)
465
(620.0)
468
(606.0)
468
(606.0)
471
(607.5)
474
(592.0)
480
(591.5)
514
(557.5)
534
(567.0)
520
(617.5)
523
(567.0)
480
(591.5)
502
(577.0)
486
(592.0)
492
(565.5)
502
(577.0)
508
(577.0)
514
(557.0)
475
(415.0)
481
(416.5)
515
(307.7)
535
(335.0)
524
(335.0)
481
(416.5)
503
(370.5)
487
(417.7)
493
(334.3)
503
(370.5)
509
(370.5)
515
(308.0)
SUBDIV. 3 L
476
(516.0)
482
(516.5)
516
(450.5)
536
(466.5)
525
(466.5)
482
(516.5)
504
(487.5)
488
(517.0)
494
(467.0)
504
(487.5)
510
(487.5)
516
(451.5)
477
(616.0)
483
(616.3)
517
(592.0)
537
(599.0)
526
(599.0)
483
(616.3)
505
(606.3)
489
(615.5)
495
(599.0)
505
(606.3)
511
(606.3)
517
(593.8)
538
(317.0)
527
(317.0)
496
(316.6)
665
(287.8)
539 SUBDIV. 4 L
(417.3)
528
(417.0)
497
(417.3)
666
(395.2)
540
(516.0)
529
(516.0)
498
(515.0)
667
(502.8)
541
(614.5)
530
(614.5)
499
(617.2)
668
(610.2)
464
(530.0)
467
(486.5)
473
(442.0)
465 SUBDIV. 4 L
(622.0)
468
(606.0)
474
(592.0)
464
(530.0)
467
(486.5)
473
(442.0)
465
(620.0)
468
(606.0)
474
(592.0)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477 SUBDIV. 6 L
(616.0)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
(616.0)
(Rev. 4)
11-37
APOLLO
Table cassette run for cassettes in inches

5x7
FULL SIZE 571
(602.0)
7x5
572
(577.0)
8x10
573
(563.5)
10x8
576
(540.8)
9.5x9.5
588
(546.0)
10x12
579
(538.8)
12x10
582
(514.0)
7x17
628
(577.0)
17x7
629
(449.0)
11x14
594
(524.5)
14x11
600
(486.0)
14x14
610
(488.0)
14x17
616
(488.0)
17x14
622
(449.5)
574 SUBDIV. 2 L
(513.6)
577
(476.8)
589
(485.5)
580
(576.7)
583
(438.3)
630
(342.0)
595
(456.3)
601
(397.5)
611
(399.2)
617
(399.3)
623
(341.5)
575
(613.0)
578
(601.5)
590
(606.0)
581
(601.0)
584
(589.0)
631
(556.0)
596
(596.3)
602
(575.5)
612
(578.0)
618
(578.0)
624
(557.4)
591
(466.5)
585
(414.5)
632
(306.4)
597
(432.0)
603
(371.0)
613
(369.5)
619
(369.5)
625
(306.4)
SUBDIV. 3 L
592
(546.6)
586
(514.5)
633
(449.5)
598
(524.5)
604
(486.0)
614
(488.0)
620
(488.0)
626
(449.4)
593
(626.0)
587
(613.5)
634
(591.5)
599
(617.0)
605
(603.5)
615
(606.0)
621
(606.0)
627
(592.4)
635
(288.0)
606
(353.0)
636 SUBDIV. 4 L
(396.0)
607
(440.5)
637
(503.3)
608
(529.5)
638
(609.5)
609
(618.3)
574
(512.0)
583
(436.3)
575 SUBDIV. 4 L
(613.0)
584
(587.0)
574
(511.0)
583
(435.0)
575
(612.0)
584
(587.3)
585
(412.5)
586
(512.5)
SUBDIV. 6 L
587
(611.5)
585
(411.2)
586
(510.7)
(Rev. 3)
11-39
APOLLO
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run The calculation is based on the typical measures of the Spot Film Device reported below: distance film-upper shutter = 17.0 mm distance film-lower shutter = 10.5 mm mean distance film-shutters = 13.75 mm (cell 443) minimum source to film distance = 1000 mm maximum source to film distance = 1500 mm. The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the calibration of the shutters minimum potmeter, i.e. when the shutters are wide open. As to line subdivisions, this position is equal to a 475 mm opening, therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to move of 475/2 mm. As to cross subdivisions, the window opening start will require a run equal to (475/2)+180=417.5 mm., where 180 mm is the width of the small shutter. Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions, the shutters will have to move of 417.5 mm. In the calculation of the formats to limit, the values KG (radiography correction), calculated with min SID (1000 mm), will be used. This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms with min SID and a thicker line with higher SIDs. Should a KG be used, calculated with SID greater than the min, the obtained separation lines would be too thin or radiograms would overlap in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for the KG calculation.
Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions correction (KG) KG = distance source-shutters / source to film distance KG = 985.8/1000 = 0.9858
Calculation shutters opening in Full size Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG where: 2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays cover the film completely
Calculation of the opening for Subdivision Format subdivision = ([(Film - (2 * N.div)] / N.div) * KG Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line Run = (426 / 2) - (Fsubdiv / 2) Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2)
(Rev. 3)
11-41
APOLLO
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.

DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH 13
FULL
SIZE
15
565
(153.0)
18
543
(183.5)
20
563
(200.0)
24
546
(240.0)
30
548
(301.0)
35
557
(353.8)
40
553
(401.0)
43
560
(431.0)
542
(131.2)
SUBDIV. 2L SUBDIV. 3L SUBDIV. 4L SUBDIV. 4L SUBDIV. 6L
544
(87.0)
564
(96.0)
547
(117.0)
549
(148.5)
558
(172.5)
554
(194.2)
561
(210.0)
551
(99.0)
559
(114.8)
555
(127.8)
562
(139.0)
556
(96.1)
669
(103.5)
545
(86.0)
566
(118.0)
550
(147.5)
552
(97.0)
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions inches

DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH 5
FULL
SIZE
7
660
(182.4)
8
640
(205.0)
9.5
650
(243.0)
10
643
(256.0)
11
653
(280.0)
12
645
(308.0)
14
656
(360.0)
17
661
(431.0)
639
(132.2)
SUBDIV. 2L SUBDIV. 3L SUBDIV. 4L SUBDIV. 4L SUBDIV. 6L
641
(98.0)
651
(115.5)
644
(124.2)
654
(136.2)
646
(149.0)
657
(176.8)
662
(210.0)
652
(78.0)
655
(89.4)
648
(99.3)
658
(115.0)
663
(139.0)
659
(85.6)
664
(103.5)
642
(100.0)
647
(149.0)
649
(100.0)
APOLLO
11-42
(Rev. 4)
11.3.5
Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements

In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors' activations differs from the feedback speed supplied by the potmeters or by the encoders, the system must be able to recognise this effect and therefore bring the equipment to a halt. This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear slippage at the potmeter. For each of the PDI-controlled movements, 2 values determine the variance amount between PDI and speed, and the time beyond which this variance triggers an alarm:
Variance time It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the value of the PDI value determined by friction or typical momentum of inertia at the start. In case a real problem occurs, the larger is this time, the longer will be the movement before an alarm is issued.
K factor This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value. The software compares the value of the speed with the PDI/k value. Being k the denominator of the fraction, the greater will be k, the smaller will be the result of the fraction. As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed, the smaller is the PDI/k value the more a mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted without issuing any alarm. By and large, the greater are the time values and k, which are set for each movement, the more the movement will accept "hardenings", allowing a non-controlled wide movement before issuing an alarm.
Angulation movement
Cell 671 672 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 8000 1.0 Setting
Scan movement
(Rev. 3)
11-43
APOLLO
Tilting-lifting movement
Shutters movement
Cassette feeding movement

Cross subdivision movement

APOLLO
11-44
(Rev. 3)
11.4
Position 701 EEprom copy

This program permits to make a copy from EEprom. This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the equipment. At every start these data are loaded in the RAM. If for safety reasons, you need to copy these data on a spare backup EEprom, please follow the procedure below: 1. Power off the equipment and position dip switches 1 and 3 on ON. 2. Power on the equipment. The following will be displayed:
701 EEPROM RAM copy Press correction, then F3

To access the EEprom copy program, carry out the procedure of access to the various groups as described above. 3. When the access to the copy program is enabled following the correct procedures, press button MODE2 as displayed, then F3. The data copy from EEprom to RAM will start. The following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM RAM copy Transferring data

After a few seconds, if the process has been completed successfully and no alarms are issued, the following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM RAM copy Transfer completed. Turn off

4. At this point, power off the equipment, replace the EEprom with an identical component on which you might want to store all functional data of the equipment. 5. Power the table back on. The following message is displayed:
702 RAM EEPROM copy Press correction, then F3

Carry out the same operations as for the EEprom RAM copy. The data will be stored on the new EEprom. The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all functional data.
(Rev. 3)
11-45
APOLLO
11.5
Position 711 Clock settings and reset alarm memory

Cells from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the RAM. Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that might be issued. For a correct interpretation of the alarms memory, it is imperative that date and time are correct. Besides, it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom. Once access to edit position 711 has been achieved (see chapter 11) the display shows:
711
22 - 10 - 2004 07 : 02 : 44
Scrolling the pages by keys "MODE3" and "TEST" the positions will be displayed:
712 713 714 715 716 717 718
Year setting Month setting Day setting Hour setting Minutes setting Seconds setting Clock adjustment
04 10 22 07 02 44 +0.0
Position 718 permits to adjust the clock in case it runs too fast or too slow due to Quarz variations. The last position of this group is the following:
719 F3 = reset Reset alarm memory

By pressing function key F3, the alarm memory stored in the Flash eprom will be reset. This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.
APOLLO
11-46
(Rev. 3)
11.6
Position 721 Test Spot Film Device and table life

The Apollo table is set to perform cyclic movement tests. These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct functioning under stress conditions. It is possible to perform tests for the Spot Film Device or table movements. After performing the access procedure, the following message will be displayed:
721 SPOT FILM DEVICE test 1
TABLE test 2
By keying in the access code relative to this position, it will be possible to select the type of test to be performed by typing 1 for the Spot Film Device test or 2 for the table test.
(Rev. 3)
11-47
APOLLO
11.6.1
Spot Film Device test

The Spot Film Device perform the initialisation procedure after which the following message is displayed:
Load cassette 30x24

By loading the cassette correctly, the cyclic test begins and the following message is displayed:
722 Test Spot Film Device life Num.cycles: 00000000 Num.exp.: 00000000
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are carried out:
Cassette position Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/2 Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/3 Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 40/4 (line) Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/4 (cross) 4th Shutters and collimator position 4th field I.I. (cell 217) Full size 43 Max I.I. (cell 216) 30/2 Medium I.I. (cell 215) Full size 43 Min I.I. (cell 214) 30/3 field I.I. (cell 217) Full size 43 Max I.I. (cell 216) 40/4 (line) Medium I.I. (cell 215) Full size 43 Min I.I. (cell 214) 30/4 (cross)
In the Full size modality, the shutters position themselves on size 43 rather than on size 30 to carry out the maximum possible run. Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in line for cassette 30 is not available. Every time the cassette is put in the parking position, the following outputs are enabled: fluoro request CCD output in rotation I.I. field output in rotation.
APOLLO
11-48
(Rev. 3)
Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position: the prep., digital prep, II step, exposure outputs are enabled the grid oscillates for 1 sec. WARNING: As outputs for the system accessories get enabled, before starting the Spot Film Device test, make sure that the accessories linked to the Apollo table are not power-supplied. At the end of each program the cassette is ejected, the cassette guides are open and closed again until they grip the cassette. At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table), before resuming with what described up until now, the following occurs: the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field

all outputs are turned on all console LEDs flash up the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs.
On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette position itself in the X-ray field, so is the number of cycles every time a complete cycle is performed. A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions. The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of the numeric keypad.
(Rev. 3)
11-49
APOLLO
11.6.2
Table test
The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the correct functioning of the various organs. WARNING: As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF circuit, during this test, the supervisor is disabled. Therefore its K3 ready relay does not close. In order to perform the test, make a jumper on the connector X47 between pins 6 and 7. Remove the jumper at the end of the test. WARNING: The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case collisions occur. Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic movements performed by this program. Particularly during the first cycle, stay close to the emergency red button and be ready to activate it if any risk condition occurs. The following message is displayed:
723 Table life test Number cycles: 00000000

Before starting the proper test cycle, the table goes into the default position with the following settings: Minimum SID Tabletop in the middle 0 angulation scan in the middle Compressor in parking position 0 tilting Minimum lift depending on the installed I.I.. Should in this phase a collision condition occur, the cycle is interrupted and the following message is displayed:
Cycle interrupted due to collision

The equipment needs to be powered off, the life test interrupted and the table positioned in a way such that no condition of collision occurs when the default position is in the process of being reached.
APOLLO
11-50
(Rev. 3)
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are carried out: SID ascent with concurrent compressor descent. When the limit is reached, the movements invert the direction until they bring themselves back with minimum SID and compressor in the parking position angulation towards the head, inversion until feet end of run and return to 0 scan movement towards head concurrent with table inward movement. When the limit is reached, the movements invert their direction until they reach the scan feet side and external table end of run. Return of both movements to the centre tilting towards Trendelembourg, movement inversion till reaching the vertical end of run, then return to 0. At the end of the tilting movement, the number of cycles increases by one unit and the cycle picks up again with the SID and compressor movement. The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of the numeric keypad. In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that the complete excursion of some movement is not possible, the test will stop the movement in proximity of the collision limit.
(Rev. 3)
11-51
APOLLO
11.7
Position 731 Remote service function

Apollo table was designed to be able to transmit data stored in EEprom and in Flash Eprom to a PC that can be directly connected to the CPU. This function is still working in the background and not yet available.
APOLLO
11-52
(Rev. 3)
11.8
Position 751 Alarms memory

The recorded alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment history allowing the identification of anomalies or failures. This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are temporarily stored in the RAM, every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads" these data in the Flash Eprom which, in turn, stores them permanently. The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 messages that are stored in progressive order with the LIFO system (last in, first out). The messages with number 1 will therefore be the most recent to be moved to position 2, 3 , 4 etc. from the following ones. Messages 100 is deleted when a new messages is stored. The last 20 messages, those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the long format, i.e. they take up 5 displays (pages) each.
(Rev. 3)
11-53
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-54
(Rev. 3)
PAGE 751: Display alarms data and table positions

Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1 a b c d e f Line 2 g h i l m a
0 p 0 E 1 N 1
X
diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm) tilting angle in degrees scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side) column angle in degrees source to film distance in mm tabletop position with respect to the centre in mm (inside negative side) main beam movement extension tube in mm middle beam movement extension tube in mm
b
2
X
c
5 D 2 F 2 F
d
1
X
e
1
X
X X X X X
1
X
2 B A
2 r
:
X
5
X
r t
i r
B A
C C
A u
r l
X X
X X
(Rev. 3)
11-55
APOLLO
PAGE 752: Display Spot Film Device organs and selections

Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1 n o p q r s Line 2 t u v z w x y n
l C i i m r
X X X X X
shutters opening dimension in mm gripping opening in mm distance grid from minimum SW (parking side) in mm cross.div trolley position from centre in mm film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm film level limitation dimension for width collimator height in cm film level limitation dimension for iris collimator in cm cassette size (width x height) selected cassette subdivision program number of subdivisions still available compressor in field = 1 in park = 0 I.I. lift position high = 1 low = 0 selected modality 0 = direct 1 = spot film device 2 = digital 3 = tomo spot film device 4 = tomo digital 5 = angio
o
G A s A
X
p
X X X X X
q
X X X X X
X X
s
X X X
N
X
G D
r i
i v
C E s
r p
o
X
C m
X
A i
C F
A u
l N
X X
APOLLO
11-56
(Rev. 3)
PAGE 753: Display joystick

Note: The value 0 means that the joystick is idle, value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred
Line 1 Position j0 j1 j2 j3 j4 Line 2 Position j5 j6 j7 j8 j9 j0

C D o F l F l
X
Joystick function
Collimator Angulation Scan tabletop Lift Tilt.- function
a
height open centering out up vertical
b
height close head side in Down Trendelem.
c
width open feet side head side centering
d
width close reset feet side function
Joystick function
source-to-film dist. compr-0-cent.tbltop fluoro request prep request X-rays request
d
X
a
up up on/off on/off on/off
b
X X
b
down down
c
0 machine
d
centr.tabletop
a
X X
b
X
c
X
j1
p m z E C N
X
a
X X
c
X X
d
X
j2
C s C A o B
X
a A
X
b
X
c
X
d
X X
j3
A r s C x X
a
X
b
X
j4
r i B F
a
X
b
X
c
X
d
X
j5
j6
j7
j8
j9
(Rev. 3)
11-57
APOLLO
PAGE 754: Display digital inputs

NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to inputs from external accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.
Line 1: Groups A B C D E Line 2: Groups F G H I

0 1 2 11 18 33 34 36 40 41 52 53 54 60 61
A D G
A
Tube at 0 End of run compressor high End of run compressor low Movement active compressor Single Fault series input Photosensor access cassette Cassette size photosensor Gripping pressure switch Button double control vertical tilt. Button double control Trendel. tilt. Button double control tabletop center. Button double control SID up Button double control SID down Dip switch modality 1 selection Dip switch modality 2 selection
B E H
19 20 21 22 23 42 43 44 45 46 62 63 3 4 35
Generator ready X-ray ON Digital workspace Spot film device workspace Shelf safety Button double control centering tilt. Button double control lift up Button double control lift down Button double control scan head side Button double control scan feet side Dip switch modality 3 selection Dip switch modality 4 selection I.I. lift end of run high I.I. lift end of run low Trapping access
C F i
27 28 29 30 31 47 48 49 50 51 55
Auxiliary fluoro control Auxiliary preparation control R control (II step auxiliary) main beam/angulation inverter started middle beam/scan inverter started Button double control angulation head side Button double control angulation feet side Button double control centering angulation Button double control tabletop inside Button double control tabletop outside Button 0 machine
2 11 18
B 19 20 21 22 23 G 52 53 54 60 61
C 27 28 29 30 31 H 62 63
D 33 34 36 40 41 i
E 42 43 44 45 46
F 47 48 49 50 51
4 35
55
APOLLO
11-58
(Rev. 3)
PAGE 755: Display digital outputs

NOTE: Motors enabling: R cassette, L cassette, shutters and cross subdivision are =1 when the motor is idle and =0 when is running. For all other outputs 0 means disabled output, 1 enabled output.
Line 1: Groups L M N P Q Line 2: Groups R S T U V
L P S V
l r
0 1 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 30 45 46 47 48 49 69 70 71 16 17
Angulation/scan request Main beam/middle beam inverter request SID relay up SID relay down Main beam brake release Height collimator motor open request Height collimator motor close request Height collimator motor fast request Iris collimator motor open request Iris collimator motor request close Tomography speed I Tomography speed II 7 tomography angle 20 tomography angle 30 tomography angle Enable L feeding motor Enable shutters motor Enable cross subdivision motor Request I.I. lift motor high Request I.I. lift motor low
M Q T
13 14 15 18 19 31 32 33 34 35 50 60 61 62 63
Middle beam brake release Angulation brake release Scan brake release Tabletop motor in request Tabletop motor out request Iris collimator motor fast request Main beam/angulation invert enable forward Main beam/angulation invert enable backward Enabling middle beam/scan inverter forward Enabling middle beam/scan inverter backwards 45 tomography angle Grid in field motor request Grid in parking pos. motor request Request gripping opening motor Request gripping closing motor
N R U
20 21 23 24 25 40 41 42 43 44 64 65 66 67 68
Compressor motor up request Compressor motor down request Width collimator motor open request Width collimator motor close request Width collimator motor fast request fluoro request X-rays request Preparation request Request digital preparation Request II step Direction R feeding motor Direction L feeding motor Direction shutter motor Direction cross subdivision motor Enable R feeding motor
1 10 11 12
m 13 14 15 18 19 s
N 20 21 23 24 25 t
p 26 27 28 29 30 u 64 65 66 67 68
Q 31 32 33 34 35 v
40 41 42 43 44
45 46 47 48 49
50 60 61 62 63
69 70 71 16 17
(Rev. 3)
11-59
APOLLO
When the diagnosis is moved - as a result of the most recent ones being introduced - to a memory position between 21 and 100, the view is reduced and occupies one single line. Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines, only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed. The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows:
PAGE 800: Display reduced diagnosis Line 1 a b c d Line 2 e f g h a

0 0 2 2 1 2 1 0
diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
b
2 9 5 6 2 2 2 5
c
1 1 1 1
d
0 0 2 2 2 1 3 0
: :
1 0
5 7
APOLLO
11-60
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)
11.9
Position 850 Table cycles memory

The Apollo table stores the activation times of the various movements besides the number of exposures and, if present, the number of movements of the I.I. lift. This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various organs with respect to the working time, and permits to evaluate whether preventative maintenance is necessary. When technical maintenance entailing the replacement of organs takes place, each movement activation time can be reset independently of the other movements. The cycles and times view is shown on 3 pages. To scroll the views, use button MODE3 to scroll down and button TEST to scroll up. Following the 3 cycles and times views, 15 reset pages for each data are available. The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried out. This holds for the Spot Film Device, digital and direct modality. The 7-digit number of cycles of the I.I. lift increases each time the I.I. ascends or descends. The activation of all other movements is displayed as time in minutes and seconds. The common fraction of the 4-digit view indicates the minutes, the 2-digit decimal fraction indicates the seconds. In the same way as for the alarm memorisation, data are stored temporarily in the RAM and every 10 minutes are permanently stored in the Flash Eprom. Following is a representation of the view relative to this group.
(Rev. 3)
11-61
APOLLO
APOLLO
11-62
(Rev. 3)
PAGE 850: Display activation cycles (first page) a b c

number of exposures (all modalities SFDDIGDIR) fluoroscopy activation time number of movements I.I. lift
d e
activation time middle beam motor movement activation time main beam motor movement
a
0 0 E 0 x 0 p 0 o 0 s 0 . 0 0 F 0 l 0 u
b
0 o . r 0 o 0 0 A 0 s 0 C
c
0 . 0 i 0 B 0 0 0 C 0 u
d
0 l . l 0 A 0 0 0 t 0 r
e
0 A . v 0 E 0
PAGE 851: Display activation cycles (second page) f g h

activation time scan motor movement activation time angulation motor movement activation time SID motor movement
i l
activation time transversal tabletop motor movement activation time compressor motor movement
f
0 0 C 0 A 0 r . r 0 o 0 0 0 p 0 E
g
0 N . D 0 . 0 0 0 0 D
h
0 F . F 0 0 0 0 B 0 A
i
0 r . . 0 0 0 0 C 0 o
l
0 m . p 0 r 0 .
(Rev. 3)
11-63
APOLLO
PAGE 852: Display activation cycles (third page) m n o

activation time shutters motor movement activ. time motors R and L belts cassette movement activation time grid motor movement
p q
activation time cross subdivision motor movement activation time cassette close motor movement
m
0 0 l 0 i 0 m . i 0 t 0 . 0 0 C 0 A
n
0 s . s 0 . 0 0 0 G 0 r
o
0 i . G 0 l 0 . 0 0 C 0 r
p
0 o . C 0 E 0 0 G 0 A 0 N
q
0 A . s 0 C 0 .
APOLLO
11-64
(Rev. 3)
From this point the 15 reset pages are displayed as follows:
00000000 F3 = reset Resetting xxxxxx xxxxxxxx

where: 00000000 Resetting = number of cycles or memorised time = description of function to be reset.
By pressing key F3, the data will be reset.
(Rev. 3)
11-65
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)
APOLLO
11-66
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Single Fault operating logic
12
SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC

The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation circuits of the table movements, i.e. those functions that may be dangerous to the patient if they are not under control. This safety measure is devised in such as way that, if a single fault at a time occurs (hence the term Single Fault), to the various levels of the chain the movement consists of, the system can identify the fault and take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate halt. The movements of: tilting lift angulation scan transversal tabletop movement source to film distance (SID) compressor which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the abovedescribed SF safety measures. All controls relative to the above-listed movements, which are present on both on the console and on the double control, together with the fluoro and X-ray preparation movements, which are present on the pedal or on the button, can be realised with a double microswitch (S). The first S is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible for the movement request. The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is connected in series with all second S that feature the SF safety function. The series connection permits to have a single wire that is sent to an input that reaches both the main processor and the supervisor. The control logic bases the SF check on the correspondence of the SF circuit and of the movements request. Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of the movement (SF circuit open, movements request circuit close). Moreover, thanks to the feedback of the potmeters of each "movement group", the main processor is able to recognise if a movement is active without an active request. To complete the redundant checks on all levels, a second processor called supervisor is connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed movements outputs) to the main processor.
(Rev. 3)
12-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Single Fault operating logic
This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor that will have to manage in a consistent way the serial and parallel data to the output ports. 2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a processor and the contact are connected in series. The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that supplies the power circuits. If any anomaly is detected, one or both processors stop exciting the relative relay and interrupt immediately any movement. Thanks to such HW and SW logic, each organ responsible for the movement is monitored and if a failure on the movement activation circuit occurs, the system can detect and interrupt the movement itself generating an alarm.
APOLLO
12-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Functionality
13
13.1
FUNCTIONALITY
Collision
When activating one or more movements, one part of the equipment might reach the safety limit beyond which a collision with the walls, the ceiling or the floor might occur. This limit, set by means of group 200 cells, represents an imaginary insuperable software barrier beyond which it is impossible to move for any part of the equipment. When a part of the equipment reaches this limit, the movement that determined this situation is stopped. The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a command that informs the operator that some movements might be disabled. The parts of the table that can collide with walls, floor or ceiling are: the image intensifier, the extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the extremities of the tabletop), the compressor and the tube-collimator group. When the extremities of the main beam, the intensifier or the compressor reach such limit, movements commands that can bring the element into collision are suddenly inhibited. On the other hand, movements commands that can bring the components away from the collision point are free. When the intensifier reaches the limit towards the floor because of the scan movement, the message SCAN LIMIT is displayed. Should this limit be reached because of the tilting movement instead, depending on where the movement comes from and is directed to (example from 90 towards 0 or from 0 towards +90 etc.), the piloting algorithm of the main beam and middle beam motors is adjusted by activating an anti-collision function. This will allow the intensifier to move out of the limit area without stopping the movement and with no need for the operator to adjust the patient centering position. As for the tube-collimator group, because of the particular Apollo table lift-tilting function, all those movements that apparently may not be dangerous but, if they continued, could increase the risk of collision are inhibited. Following are 4 tables with the representations of the various conditions. Each representation is a "LIMIT REACHED" condition for the tubecollimator group with the right wall, the left wall, the ceiling and the floor.
(Rev. 3)
13-1
APOLLO
In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table (RIB) or the column (ANG) could find themselves when the limit is reached. "0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal position, "+" indicates that the table is inclined towards the vertical position and "-" that the table is inclined towards the Trendelemburg. "0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular to the table, "+" indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet and "-" that it is inclined towards the head. The 5 following couples of columns report the movements and relative directions responsible for the direct or indirect movement of the tubecollimator group. The YES cells indicate that the movement is free, while the NO cells indicated that the movement is inhibited. The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that particular combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.
Table showing movements allowed for Tube Right Wall collision

ANGLES
TILT ANG
SCAN
HEAD
YES
ANGULATION
HEAD
YES
TILTING
TREND
YES
LIFT
UP
NO
SID
UP
NO
FEET
NO
FEET
NO
VERT
NO
DOWN
NO
DOWN
YES
0 0 0
+ 0 0
+ + + -
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
+ + -
YES YES YES
NO NO NO
NO YES YES
NO NO NO
NO YES YES
NO NO NO
NO NO NO
NO YES NO
NO NO NO
YES YES YES
APOLLO
13-2
(Rev. 3)
Table showing movements allowed for Tube Left Wall collision

ANGLES
TILT ANG
SCAN
HEAD FEET
ANGULATION
HEAD FEET
TILTING
TREND VERT UP
LIFT
DOWN UP
SID
DOWN
0 0 0
+ 0 0
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
+ + + -
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
+ + -
NO NO NO
YES YES YES
NO NO NO
YES YES NO
NO NO NO
YES YES NO
NO NO NO
NO YES NO
NO NO NO
YES YES YES
Table showing movements allowed for Tube Ceiling collision

ANGLES
TILT ANG
SCAN
HEAD
NO NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES
ANGULATION
HEAD
NO NO YES NO YES NO NO NO YES
TILTING
TREND
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
LIFT
UP
SID
UP
FEET
NO NO NO YES NO YES YES NO NO
FEET
NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO
VERT
DOWN
YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
DOWN
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
0 0 0
+ 0 0
+ + + -
+ + -
(Rev. 3)
13-3
APOLLO
Table showing movements allowed for Tube Floor collision

ANGLES
TILT ANG
SCAN
HEAD FEET
ANGULATION
HEAD FEET
TILTING
TREND VERT UP
LIFT
DOWN UP
SID
DOWN
0 0 0
+ 0 0
YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES
+ + + -
+ + -
APOLLO
13-4
(Rev. 3)
13.1.1
Anticollision barrier
When the room where the device is installed has irregularities in its geometry that make necessary supplemental anticollision measures, the Apollo table can be protected against the risk of collision with these geometrical irregularities of the room. Depending from the specific needs it is possible to implement light barrier sensors or antenna switches that when activated prevent table components from hitting obstacles of the room. Connection of these safety devices must be done so that it sends 0V to input X0-17 when operating conditions are correct; when the safety barrier is infringed the input must open Once the anticollision sensor is activated, the movement in progress is stopped and a message is displayed: << LIMIT BARRIER >> with an intermittent buzzer sound. To exit this condition and restore normal operation of the system, it will be possible to activate only the movement that had generated the "limit barrier" alarm in the opposite direction. All other commands (joystick on console and keys on the on-board keypad) are disabled until the message "limit barrier" is removed. If the limit barrier is activated in the following conditions: switch on of the system access to tomography functionality access to angiographic functionality during execution of a Tomography test during execution of a step angiography test movement to reach a stored position by means of command "0". the movement is stopped and the active functionality, if any, is reset. In this condition no joystick or button of the on board keyboard is active, then to exit from this "limit barrier" lock it is necessary to proceed with a "bypass" procedure as outlined here below. Keeping pressed at the same time keys F4 and F5, positioned in the lower end of the display, ALL movement commands by joystick or on board keyboard are enabled, making possible to start any movement. This "bypass" procedure is always possible when the "limit barrier" condition has been reached. WARNING: This "bypass" procedure can be very dangerous since a wrong command can cause any part of the table to hit the obstacle in the room. Before giving any movement command it is necessary to check carefully which movement will bring the table far away from the obstacle. In any case always activate the movement with great care in short pulses.
(Rev. 3)
13-5
APOLLO
13.1.2
Anti entrapment device

The Apollo table can be equipped with an anti-entrapment feature (standard on C-CSA-US versions) which blocks the angulation movement an the inner table top side movement should the patient come in contact with the areas in which the anti-entrapment sensors are located. In this case the angulation and/or inner table top side movements are automatically blocked and it is possible to activate the unit only in the opposite direction of that which caused the entrapment. The circuit is realised in such a way if the safety membranes are pressed the movement is blocked as described above, and if the circuit is broken alarm 82 is generated.
APOLLO
13-6
(Rev. 3)
13.2
Compressor
When the compressor is not in the parking position (i.e. when the high end of run microswitch is released), by enabling the tabletop movement or the scan movement, the following will occur: the requested movement is not activated the compressor goes up for 0.5 sec after complete release of the compression force. When the time limit is almost reached, the ascent stops and a confirmation acoustic signal is issued. Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired movement. The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo table movements of the "dead man" type, therefore, if during the compressor ascent the joystick is released, the movement will stop. By pushing the joystick once again, the ascent is enabled again for a time depending on the current compression force without taking into account the previous partial ascent. Only after completion of the ascent, the tabletop and scan movements will be free. It will then be possible to move the patient and the tube without risk and, afterwards, compress the patient once again. When the compressor is in a position different from the idle one, by activating the angulation movement, the compressor is taken back to the parking position. The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for 240 msecs if the potmeter exceeds the set dead band. This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the cone, such as by breathing. NOTE: Every time the compressor activates the parking switch, the set value of the compressor force is forced to 5 kg (11.0 lbs).
(Rev. 3)
13-7
APOLLO
13.3
Collimator
The Apollo table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a square field one with iris. The software pilots the iris axis if the presence of the collimator with iris is confirmed through the selection of cell 253. The collimator operating modes are: automatic manual. The automatic mode can in turn be associated to the Hold function. The selection of the collimator operating mode depends both on the choice of the operator and on the condition of the "Digital (X0-14)" and " Spot Film Device (X0-15)" inputs. The conditions are:
Inputs X0-14 ON (Digital) X0-15 ON (Spot Film Device) X0-14 OFF X0-15 OFF (Direct) Manual modality NOT POSSIBLE SELECTABLE ACTIVE Automatic modality ACTIVE SELECTABLE NOT POSSIBLE
When the automatic function is active or selected, the Hold function can be activated or excluded by the operator.
Manual modality If no program is selected, when the fluoro control is not active, by means of the joystick it is possible to collimate a format comprised between the minimum and maximum size. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of the collimator during this limitation. Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum format available is equal to the selected I.I.. When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format. This condition is valid regardless whether the fluoro control is activated or not. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator width axis if a further reduction is performed, except for if a cross subdivision has been performed
APOLLO
13-8
(Rev. 3)
When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison with the one of the selected I.I., when the fluoro control is not active, by means of the joystick, it will be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the selected format. Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum possible format is the one of the selected I.I. field. The manual function LED on the console is always on regardless whether the fluoro control is on or off. In case the collimation is greater in comparison with the selected I.I. field, by pressing the fluoro control, the collimation will be reduced to the I.I. format. When the fluoro control is released, the shutters go back to the position in they had before the activation of the fluoro control. At any time, the automatic collimator function may be selected. Both axes will bring themselves on the selected I.I. format position If the equipment is powered off when the collimator is in the manual mode, when powering back on, the automatic function will be activated. In case an iris collimator is present, the iris limitation control buttons are not active and the iris will always be circumscribed at the width and height axes.
Automatic modality If no program is selected, by means of the joystick, it is possible to collimate a format comprised between the set I.I. format and the minimum one. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of the collimator during this limitation. When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator width axis if a further reduction is performed, except the case in which a cross subdivision has been performed When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison with the one of the selected I.I., by means of the joystick, it will be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the selected I.I. field. When the preparation control is activated, the collimator always positions itself on the selected subdivision format At any time the manual collimator function may be selected. If an iris collimator is present, it is possible to collimate in a circular way by means of the iris control buttons. In this case the axes and height will be circumscribed to the iris.
(Rev. 3)
13-9
APOLLO
Hold automatic modality The functioning is identical to the automatic modality except for the case in which during the fluoro a reduction by means of the joystick of one of both axes is performed. In this case when preparation is activated the collimator stays in the position obtained by means of the joystick. The same holds for the limitations performed by means of the iris.
Both collimators, with or without iris are fitted with a halogen lamp for the patient centering without fluoro. By pressing the lamp collimator button when the light is off the light goes on, by pressing the lamp collimator button when the light is on the light goes off. The light goes off anyhow after 45 secs. from the switching on. WARNING: The switching on and off cycle of the collimator lamp should not exceed 2 consecutive duty cycles followed by 180 secs. of switching off. This work cycle ensures that the parts that might get into contact with the patient do not reach high temperatures due to overheating of the halogen lamp.
APOLLO
13-10
(Rev. 3)
13.4
Table automatic positioning

The Apollo table is designed in such a way to allow to store 3 operating conditions. Buttons MODE1, MODE2 and MODE3 permit to store and retrieve these conditions, the joystick and the 0 key on the console and on the keypad on board of the table permit to reach stored positions. The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and contain default values when the equipment is shipped from the factory and every time that the potmeters adjustment subroutine (group 100) is accessed. Note that if the operator has stored positions different from the default ones, by performing technical maintenance with access to group 100, such memorised values will be lost. The same will happen if the EEPROM is replaced. When all 3 memories are default ones, the 3 LEDs relative to the MODE buttons are off. The default positions are as follows: tilting at 0 with lift at minimum depending on the installed I.I. scan in the middle column at 0 SID on minimum Tabletop in the centre Compressor in parking position Slow tilting speed tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor. To modify these stored values, bring the above-listed movements in the desired positions and choose the 3 selections (tilting speed and movement orientation) depending on the need. After setting the above-mentioned values, press for 5 secs. the MODE button you want to associate with the actual configuration. At the end of the 5 secs. the following message is displayed:
POSITIONS STORED
To recall a condition, press the MODE button which the desired setting is associated to. When the relative LED lights up, hold the joystick or key 0 pressed until the setting is completed. The completion of such procedure is confirmed with the following message
POSITIONS REACHED
on the display. When one or more stored values are present, the last selection (LED associated to the MODE button on) is maintained both during the operating mode and at the start. The joystick and button 0 are not active, therefore the table positioning is not allowed when the angio step and tomo modalities are active.
(Rev. 3)
13-11
APOLLO
APOLLO
13-12
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode
14
14.1
OPERATING MODE
Spot Film Device
Input X0-15 is active. The size of the cassette in the Spot Film Device and the number of possible exposures are shown on the display once the subdivision program has been selected. The collimator can be selected in automatic, automatic+hold, or manual mode. It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional). The Spot Film Device performs all the cassette-carrying scan, vibration grid and shutter movements. These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator. It is possible to carry out radiography investigations with return of the cassette to the park at the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro investigation or in rapid mode, by performing sequential exposures.
(Rev. 3)
14-1
APOLLO
1.1.1
"Standard radiography" performance block diagram

Park cassette I.I. or div. shutters I.I. or div. collimator I step: Movement towards posit. exposure of: - Cassette - Shutters - Collimator "Prep. request" out ON Reaching final position of: - Cassette - Shutters - Collimator within 5 secs. YES II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES Grid movement start Cell 223 time decrease Cell 223 timeout : "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs. YES Exposure in progress. Pedal release with "X-ray presence" input ON NO "X-ray presence" input ON after 6.5 secs.
Reset joystick activation
NO Alarm 060
NO
Alarm 062
NO YES YES
Alarm 064 I step: Alarm 067 II step: Alarm 066 Alarm 065
NO YES I and II step release with X-ray end time. ("X-ray presence" OFF) NO
APOLLO
14-2
(Rev. 3)
14.1.2
"Rapid sequence" block diagram

Subdivision and shutter select. Park cassette I.I. or div. shutters I.I. or div. collimator I step: Movement towards posit. exposure of: - Cassette - Shutters - Collimator "Prep. request" out ON Grid movem. start Reaching final position of: - Cassette - Shutters - Collimator within 5 secs. YES II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs. YES "X-ray presence" input (End X-ray) OFF within: 6.5 sec - "X-ray request" out OFF YES Program end NO Pedal release with program not end
Reset joystick activation alarms Progr. aborted Tray expelled
NO
Alarm 061
NO
Alarm 062
NO
Alarm 064
NO YES YES
Alarm 065
Alarm 063
NO Next Tray Out "X-ray request" ON YES "X-ray presence" input ON within 3 secs.
NO
Alarm 064
Tray OUT or park (sel. esp)
(Rev. 3)
14-3
APOLLO
14.2
Standard tomographic
The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography angles (7, 20, 30, 45) each of which can be associated with 2 speeds. The layer can be set with steps of 1 mm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to a value of 350 mm (13.8"). The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or viceversa and the automatic layer increase function can be selected. This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on the angle set while respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below: 7 increase 30 mm (1.1") 20 increase 20 mm (0.8") 30 increase 10 mm (0.4") 45 increase 5 mm (0.2") It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential tomography). In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography, the automatic layer increase is always active. At the end of the ray angle, the operating mode provides for the immediate departure of the column for the next tomography. The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice versa.
APOLLO
14-4
(Rev. 4)
14.2.1
"Standard tomography" block diagram

Tomo ON (ang+speed+div) Park cassette I.I. or div. shutters I.I. or div. collimator I step: Movement towards exposure position of: Cassette, Shutters, Collimator Grid movement start Column towards load Out "prep. request." ON Reached final position of: - Cassette - Shutters - Collimator within 5 secs. YES II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES Column movement Start Column in Tomo angle "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs.
Centering joystick activation
NO
Alarm 060
NO
Alarm 062
NO YES
Alarm 064
YES Tomography in progress "X-ray presence" input OFF with column still at Tomo (X-ray request ON) NO X-ray presence ON for more than 0.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO YES I and II step release with column centering ended NO Centering joystick YES activation. Column at 0
(Rev. 3)
Alarm 068
YES
Alarm 069
14-5
APOLLO
14.2.2
"Sequential tomography" block diagram
Tomo ON (ang+speed+div) Cassette park I.I. or div. shutters I.I. or div. collimator I step: Movement towards position exposure of: - Cassette, Shutters, Collimator Grid movement start Column towards load "Prep. request." out ON Reaching final position of: - Cassette, Shutters, Collimator within 5 secs. YES II step at the generator Input "generat.Ready" within 3 secs. YES
Centering joystick activation
NO
Alarm 060
NO
Alarm 062
Column movement start Column in Tomo angle Out "X-ray request" ON
"X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs. YES Tomography in progress "X-ray presence" input OFF with column still in Tomo (X-ray request ON) NO X-ray presence ON for more than 0.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO
NO
Alarm 064
YES
Alarm 068
YES
Alarm 069
NO
Start for next tomography X-ray control release
YES YES End of sequence with column centering ended NO YES Centering joystick activation. Column at 0
APOLLO
14-6
(Rev. 3)
14.3
Direct
Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated. The display indicates DIR. The collimator can only be selected in manual mode. It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro request output towards the generator is disabled. It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional). The Spot Film Device in this phase does not perform the cassette carrying scan movement, grid vibration and shutters. The preparation outputs, II step and exposure are sent to the generator and without conditioning. Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected.
(Rev. 3)
14-7
APOLLO
14.4
Digital
This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image acquisition, storage and processing device. The Apollo table has been designed and built to be connected to the digital systems VDR 2000, DIVA and DIVA-D. Input X0-14 is active. The display shows the initials DIG. The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or automatic+hold. It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional). The Spot Film Device, if fitted, does not perform the cassette and grid vibration movement in this phase, while the shutters follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator.
APOLLO
14-8
(Rev. 3)
14.4.1
"Digital radiography" block diagram

Digital ON No cass or cass in park I step: Out "prep. request." ON II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs. YES Exposure in progress DSI Exposure frequency YES I and II step release in any condition NO
NO
Alarm 062
NO
Alarm 064
(Rev. 3)
14-9
APOLLO
14.5
Digital Tomography
The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image acquisition system (see digital mode). The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with the same options of the standard tomographic mode. The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I.I. of the film.
APOLLO
14-10
(Rev. 3)
14.5.1
"Digital tomography" block diagram

Digital ON Tomo ON (ang+speed) I step: Column towards load Out "prep. request." ON II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES Movement column start Column in Tomo angle "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs.
Centering joystick activation Reset joystick activation
NO
Alarm 062
NO YES
Alarm 064
YES X-ray presence ON for more than 0.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO YES I and II step release with column centering ended NO YES Centering joystick activation. Column at 0
Alarm 069
(Rev. 3)
14-11
APOLLO
14.5.2
"Digital tomography" block diagram

Digital ON Tomo ON (ang+speed) I step: Column towards load Out "prep. request." ON II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES Column movement start Column in Tomo angle "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs.
Centering joystick activation Reset joystick activation
NO
Alarm 062
NO YES
Alarm 064
YES X-ray presence ON for more than 0.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO NO Start for next tomography X-ray control release YES YES I and II step release with column centering ended NO Centering joystick YES activation. Column at 0
Alarm 069
APOLLO
14-12
(Rev. 3)
14.6
Angiographic
Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital acquisition system. The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the peripheral artery circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid administered to the patient. The mode provides for the movement of the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group with "steps" established by the size of the selected I.I. field. When the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group completes the movement, the prep.- II step-exposure make it possible to take digital images.
(Rev. 3)
14-13
APOLLO
14.6.1
"Stepping angio" block diagram

Angiografic mode select. Digital ON Scan positioning Station choice
Reset joystick activation alarms Progr. aborted NO Alarm 062
I station:
I step: "Digital prep. request" out ON YES II step at the generator Input "generat. Ready" within 3 secs. YES "X-ray request" out ON "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.36 secs. YES Exposure release and prep. per exposure interruption I step: (within 15 sec) "Digital prep. request" out ON Scan movement start per step YES
NO
Alarm 064
NO
Alarm 078
NO
Next station
Scan position reached Last station

YES Program end
APOLLO
14-14
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Emergency end run
15
RUN EMERGENCY END R

All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits established by the potmeters and stored in the EEprom. All the table movements are equipped with hardware emergency end runs, in case the software fails to stop for a malfunction, the emergency microswitch positioned immediately after the end of the run software, is engaged. The emergency microswitches are connected in series and, if the circuit opens, power is cut to the power supply main switch K1L. All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient, of the operator and the table if there is a malfunction. The opening of the main switch K1L also determines the opening of the "power circuit OK" input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080. The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified by the following table:
Switch S32 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 Organ Main beam-middle beam SID SID Tabletop Tabletop Middle beam Middle beam Angulation Angulation Scan Scan Main beam Main beam Side Main beam-middle beam collision LOW HIGH Inner Outer Minimum Maximum Head Feet Feet Head Minimum Maximum
After turning off the system, the reason for this situation being created must be identified.
(Rev. 3)
15-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Emergency end run
Once the cause has been removed, do the following to restore operation: 1. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet. 2. Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down. Wait till the end of the initialisation cycle. 3. Use the joystick which caused the emergency situations, in the direction opposite that of the emergency. 4. Release button S1. WARNING: If button S1 is pressed, the series of emergency microswitches is overridden, so if the cause of the failure is not removed, there will be the danger that the movement follows its run without any electrical protection.
APOLLO
15-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment
16
16.1
HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
A3 output PCB
The trimmers used for the collimator Axle Adjustment Movements are on the A3 output PCB. Here below you will find information about how to operate on them.
16.1.1
Collimator axle speed adjustment

Trimmer to be adjusted: R15-R20-R25. Function: R15: width collimator axle speed adjustment R20: height collimator axle speed adjustment R25: iris collimator axle speed adjustment Procedure of adjustment: The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to vary the speeds of the collimator axle movement motor. This adjustment varies both the speeds the collimator motors use. The high speed is the one directly obtained from the relative trimmer adjustment, and is applied when an axle is at distance from the set point that is greater than the slowdown band (cells 232, 233, 234). This speed is always used with activation of the joysticks. The low speed is applied, by means of a hardware partition deactivated by a processor command. The low speed is activated when the axle enters the slowdown zone. LEDs 26, 29 and 32 indicate when the high speed is activated. The rotation of the trimmer in a clockwise direction increases the speeds. The trimmers are of the 20 rev. type. The possibility of monitoring this adjustment is double. It is in fact possible to verify the adjustment in terms of both reference voltages at the operating devices and directly on the Power supply motors. It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC for the collimator shutters movement between: TP10 (gnd) - TP1: width collimator motor TP10 (gnd) - TP4: height collimator motor and can assume a value between 0 and 8 Vdc that will correspond proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to 24 Vdc.
(Rev. 3)
16-1
APOLLO
It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC for the iris collimator shutters movement between: TP10 (gnd) - TP7: iris collimator motor and can assume a value between 0 and 3.5 Vdc that will correspond proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to 10 Vdc. It will be possible to check the voltage at the ends of the motors thanks to the : TP2 - TP3: width collimator motor TP5 - TP6: height collimator motor TP8 - TP9: iris collimator motor. The required adjustment is obtained when the voltage at the ends of the motors the measured voltage is 24 Vdc throughout the range of movement at high speed.
APOLLO
16-2
(Rev. 3)
16.1.2
Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction)

Trimmer to be adjusted: R38-R48-R58. Function: R38: width collimator axle torque gain adjustment R48: height collimator axle torque gain adjustment R58: iris collimator axle torque gain adjustment Adjustment procedure: The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to adjust the torque gain of the gripper movement motor. The gain increases when the trimmer is turned in a clockwise direction. The trimmers are twenty turn types. A good adjustment of this gain makes it possible to get an even movement that is free of vibrations, since in points where mechanical hardening of the movement is possible, this gain provides a higher torque in order to overcome the hardening. To obtain the adjustment required do the following for each of the axles: 1. Turn the trimmer of the axle to be adjusted in a clockwise direction (+). 2. When the axle begins to wobble, turn the trimmer in an anticlockwise direction. 3. When the self-oscillation stops, turn the trimmer again by 1 turn in an anticlockwise direction.
(Rev. 3)
16-3
APOLLO
16.2
Compressor PCB
The activation of the compressor movements, the stop at the microswitches end run and reaching the set compression forces are managed by the software and controlled by output PCB A3. The K14 and K15 relays are responsible for the movement activation. The control of the motor and the speed change switch S31 are dependent on PCB A15 (Figure 16-1) that has the function of "managing the power" of the motor. There are 3 trimmers on this PCB, each having the function of adjusting one speed. The compressor motor in fact is controlled with 3 different speeds i.e. to ensure that the movement is: sufficiently high in the compression and patient release zone sufficiently slow in the stretch from the park to the field with speed identical to the field entrance speed, when brought from field to park. To correctly carry out the adjustment of these 3 speeds the table must be horizontal and the column taken to 0 degrees. In this condition the compressor equipment masses act unfavourably, making the adjustment optimal in any condition.
Adjustment of compression speed This adjustment must be carried out first of all because it influences the other two. With motor in movement in the up/down zone, a voltage of 32 Vdc must be measured at the test points TP4 and TP5 to be obtained by means of the adjustment trimmer R38. Adjustment of speed towards the park When the compressor is piloted towards the parking position, at the end of the vertical ascent stretch, a mechanical system starts the cone rotating speed change switch S31 is activated. This determines the selection of the input speed. This speed can be adjusted by means of the trimmer R39 and, with active movement in this zone, a voltage of 11 Vdc must be read on the test points TP4 and TP5. Adjustment of exit speeds from the park When the compressor is piloted from the parking zone until switch S31 is active, the input speed, that can be regulated by means of trimmer R40, is used. When the movement is active in this stretch, a voltage of 9 Vdc must be read at test points TP4 and TP5
APOLLO
16-4
(Rev. 3)
Figure 16-1
(Rev. 3)
16-5
APOLLO
APOLLO
16-6
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter
17
THREE-PHASE INVERTER
The inverters in the Apollo table's electrical cabinet are used to control the 4 three-phase motors responsible for the movements of: tilting, lift, angulation and scan. Only 2 motors will be piloted at a time, angulation and scan or main beam and middle beam. The output of the inverter in fact is connected to the motor to be activated through the action of 4 remote switches. The model of the inverter is: MITSHUBISHI model FR-E540 3,7K EC.
(Rev. 3)
17-1
APOLLO
17.1
Inverter input/output functions

The connection of the inverter, in the specific application for the Apollo equipment, requires the use of the commands listed below.
Number of the terminal L1-L2-L3 Function Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply. Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency between 0 and 120 Hz. In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be reversed. The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not change the rotation. This is the pole of the open collector for the RUN signal. This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed. It is the reference 0 V for the V ref. signal (terminal 2). This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V. This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF signals. This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V. This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V) present when the inverter is in movement (acceleration and deceleration ramps included). This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the end of the ramp. Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be possible to exchange the connection to the motor by means of the remote power switch. When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the "FORWARD" direction. When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the "BACK" direction. Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc. This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73 (Pr73=1 range 0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V). The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input signal in this terminal. This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in parameter Pr38. This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the inverter. This contact is closed when the inverter is under normal functioning conditions. In the case of failure the contact is open. The contacts of the 2 inverters are connected in series and depend on an input of input PCB A2. When this input is polarised at 0 V, the inverter selects the second set of operational parameters. The main beam and middle beam motors actually use a different booster value from the one necessary for the angulation and scan motors.
U-V-W
SE 5 SD
RUN
STF STR
A-C
RL
APOLLO
17-2
(Rev. 3)
17.2
Inverter hardware setting

The inverter FR-E540 - 3,7K EC is designed to accept inputs and pilot outputs in PNP logic (high active) or NPN (low active). The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE "jumper" on the front of the inverter below the cover. Since Apollo has been designed in NPN logic, the "jumper" will have to be in the position SINK.
17.3
Inverter software parameters setting

To permit the use of the FR-E540 - 3,7K EC inverter in the most various applications, a large number of parameters that can be set are present in the memory. Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo, so even if modified they will not change the functioning of the equipment, others are used but the data contained is the default settings contained in the basic inverter program. In conclusion, some parameters are modified with respect to the default value by Villa Sistemi Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by Apollo. The modified parameters and the non-modified parameters but ones that interact on the functioning of Apollo are listed below and divided into two groups, while those parameters that do not lead to any effect on the functioning of the equipment are not mentioned. For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter, it is however possible to consult the dedicated manual, supplied together with the equipment.
(Rev. 3)
17-3
APOLLO
17.3.1
Param.
Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali

Data Function Boost at the start (1st parameters set). This parameter provides the motor with a boost at the start that enables the inertia of the system to be compensated for. Excessive adjustment generates a start of the movement that is too brusque, while not enough adjustment can cause the non-start of the movement in load conditions. This value is used for the angulation and scan motors (see input RL). Rated motor frequency (1st parameter set). The rated frequency characteristic of the motor used must be inserted in this parameter. Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor determines the acceleration of the movement depending on the PDI function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function. Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor determines the deceleration of the movement depending on the PDI function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function. Activation of the functioning block for excessive current to the motor. When setting 0, when the threshold of the maximum continuous current limit that can be delivered by the inverter is exceeded, the message OL is shown on the display without a stop in operations. Rated motor voltage. The rated voltage characteristic of the motor used must be included in this parameter. This data is the reference frequency value for the acceleration and deceleration parameters. Stall prevention extreme current. This parameter indicates the limit of the current supplied to the motor during functioning at various speeds. This the maximum output frequency that the inverter supplies to the motor when the analogue input of the reference signal is at the maximum value (+10 V). See Pr.7 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. See Pr.8 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. See Pr.0 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. See Pr.3 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. This the PWM frequency sent to the motor. The value of 13 KHz makes it possible to eliminate the noise provided by the movement of the motor guaranteeing however a low risk of EMC emissions. This the parameter that determines the minimum and maximum value that the reference analogue input for the speed can assume (0 +10 Vdc).
Pr.0
20
Pr.3 Pr.7
50 0
Pr.8
Pr.9
Pr.19 Pr.20 Pr.22 Pr.38 Pr.44 Pr.45 Pr.46 Pr.47 Pr.72
400 100 150 90 0 0 6 50 13
Pr.73
APOLLO
17-4
(Rev. 3)
Param. Pr.74 Pr.77 Pr.79 Pr.180 Pr.192
Data 1 2 2 3 11
Function This is the speed reference analogue signal software filter. The data 0 guarantees an immediate response of the inverter when the Vref reference signal changes. This data enables the modification of the parameters. This is the parameter that makes it possible to enable the functions of the inverter from outside signals sent to the terminal block. This makes it possible for the terminal RL to perform the 2nd set of parameters setting function. This enables the status relay whose exchange contact refers to terminals A-B-C (used for OK inverter) deactivating it with inverter OFF or in state of alarm. This turns on the cooling fans of the power jumper only if the inverter is running or if the operating temperature has exceeded the values allowed.
Pr.244
(Rev. 3)
17-5
APOLLO
17.3.2
Parameters that maintain the default settings

Listed here below are the parameters that, if modified, could jeopardise the proper functioning of the equipment. Nevertheless, this list is given to permit, in case of doubt or malfunctioning, to check the parameter values are correct. The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult the inverter manual provided together with the machine for more thorough information.
Param. Data Pr.1 Pr.2 Pr.10 Pr.11 Pr.12 Pr.13 Pr.14 Pr.18 Pr.21 Pr.37 Pr.39 Pr.41 Pr.42 Pr.43 Pr.52 Pr.55 Pr.56 Pr.60 Pr.61 Pr.62 Pr.63 Pr.65 120 0 3 0.5 6 0.5 0 120 0 0 50 10 6 9999 0 50 4 0
Function Maximum frequency Minimum frequency DC braking (voltage) DC braking (time) DC braking (voltage) Start frequency Load selection curve Max high speed frequency Accelerat./decelerat. time increase Machine speed indication Freq. with ref. 20 mA Comparison of rated/real val. Output frequency threshold Reverse output frequency threshold PU display variable select. Freq. indicat. end of scale Current indic. end of scale Smart mode selection
Param. Data Pr.66 Pr.67 Pr.68 Pr.69 Pr.70 Pr.71 Pr.75 Pr.78 Pr.128 Pr.150 Pr.151 Pr.152 Pr.153 Pr.158 Pr.160 Pr.171 Pr.181 Pr.182 Pr.183 Pr.191 Pr.240 50 0 1 0 0 0 14 0 0 150 0 5.0 0.5 0 0 0 1 2 6 4 1
Function Current limit reduction frequency Number of alarm resets Automatic reset wait time Reset count zeroing Special braking service Choice of motor Select: reset, PU stop Inversion disabling PID action selection Current threshold level Current control time Current threshold level 0 Current control time 0 AM terminal variab. select. Parameter group reading selection Funct. hour counter reset RM terminal funct. select. RH terminal funct. select. MRS terminal funct. select. FU terminal funct. select. PWM soft setting
9999 Reference current 9999 Accelerat. ref. current 9999 Deceleration ref. current 0 Automatic reset selection
APOLLO
17-6
(Rev. 3)
17.4
Access to parameters for writing

If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify them, carry out the operations listed below to access the memory of the inverter. 1. With the inverter in standby remove the front cover door. 2. Press the MODE key, the display will show the writing Pr. 3. Press the SET key. P.000 will be shown on the screen with hundreds digit flashing. 4. To modify the hundreds data, press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 5. To store the hundreds value press the SET key. 6. The tens digit flashes. To modify the data, press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 7. To store the tens value press the SET key. 8. The unit digit flashes. To modify the data, press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 9. Press the SET key. At this point the value in the selected parameter is shown. 10. To modify the data in the memory, press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 11. To confirm the modification press the SET key and hold it down for 3 secs. As a confirmation of the successful storage to memory the display indicates the number of the cell and the value of the data flashing them alternately. 12. To modify another parameter press the SET key, the next parameter is shown on the display. 13. To select the required parameter, press the 5 and 6 keys and scroll through the list. 14. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key three times to exit the routine. NOTE: When the MODE key is pressed the first time, the display shows Opnd and the second, Help. This display shows the possibility of accessing 2 routines that are not used.
(Rev. 3)
17-7
APOLLO
17.5
Procedure for restoring the default parameters

WARNING: This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in the inverter that has compromised all the settings. When this procedure is carried out, the default values in the various parameters will be stored to memory. So, before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the table "Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali" must be reset and the data contained in the "Parameters that maintain the default settings" table must be checked. Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest attention. 1. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for writing " paragraph select the cell Pr.79 and change the data stored with the value 1. WARNING: The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also from the keyboard. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention to the use of the keys until the data contained in parameter Pr.79 is restored at value 2. 2. Press the MODE key, the display shows the PU mode. 3. Press the MODE key, the display shows the help mode. 4. Press the 5 key four times until getting the indication ALLC. on the display 5. Pressing the SET key, the data 0 is shown. 6. Press key 5 to show the data 1. 7. Press for 2 secs. the key SET To confirm. The display begins to flash indicating that the default settings has been stored to memory. 8. Press the MODE key to exit the reset procedure. 9. Reprogram the data by modifying Pr.77 parameters first followed by Pr.79 to make access possible to all the other parameters.
APOLLO
17-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Function of the outputs card LEDS
18
FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS

On the A3 outputs PCB (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that indicate the condition of the active output.
Figure 18-1
(Rev. 3)
18-1
APOLLO
The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed below. H1 LED GROUP LED 1 (Out 0) LED 2 (Out 1) LED LED LED LED LED LED 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) K7M and K9M (angulation and scan) remote switch call K6M and K8M (main beam and middle beam) remote switch call R-L monitor image scan reverse HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse minimum I.I. field selection medium I.I. field selection maximum I.I. field selection activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main processor
H2 LED GROUP LED 9 (Out 8) LED 10 (Out 9) LED 11 (Out 10) LED 12 (Out 11) LED 13 (Out 12) LED 14 (Out 13) LED 15 (Out 14) LED 16 (Out 15) H3 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23)
spare spare SID up SID down main beam motor brake release middle beam motor brake release angulation motor brake release scan motor brake release
I.I. lift up I.I. lift down tabletop inside tabletop outside compressor up compressor down collimator lamp on width collimator opens
H4 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30) 31) width collimator closes width collimator fast height collimator opens height collimator closes height collimator fast iris collimator opens iris collimator closes iris collimator fast 18-2
(Rev. 3)
APOLLO
H5 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 32) 33) 34) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) angulation-main beam inverter forward angulation-main beam inverter back middle beam-scan inverter forward middle beam-scan inverter back spare spare tomo 2nd speed tomo 3rd speed
H6 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 40) 41) 42) 43) 44) 45) 46) 47) fluoro request X-ray request preparation request digital preparation request second step preparation request tomo 1st speed tomo 4th speed tomo 7
H7 LED GROUP LED 49 (Out 48) LED 50 (Out 49) LED 51 (Out 50) LED 52 (Out 51) LED 53 (Out 52) LED 54 (Out 53) LED 55 (Out 54) LED 56 (Out 55) tomo 20 tomo 30 tomo 45 X-ray presence without request Kv automatic-manual fluoro spare spare angio step start
H8 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 56) 57) 58) 59) 60) 61) 62) 63) motion detection CCD x0 CCD x4 CCD x8 grid in field grid in park cassette gripper opening cassette gripping
(Rev. 4)
18-3
APOLLO
H9 FUNCTION LEDS LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 64) 65) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70) 71) R cassette motor direction L cassette motor direction shutter motor direction cross subdivision motor direction R cassette motor enabling L cassette motor enabling shutter motor enabling cross subdivision motor enabling
APOLLO
18-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results
19
CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS

Spot Film Device adjustment
The Spot Film Device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made, however once the installation of the system has been completed, a further adjustment might be necessary after carrying out the test radiographs. To verify the correct position of the cassette, both longitudinal and transversal, and the shutters it will be necessary to exclude the automatic function of the collimator that could interfere in limiting the size. To open the collimator axles automatically to the maximum size data 1 must be input in cell 262. When this function is active, the message " Service function active" appears on the control desk display.
19.1
(Rev. 3)
19-1
APOLLO
19.1.1
Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette

The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam, during the exposure program, must be correct. An effective method for this verification is provided by the following procedure: 1. Insert a 40x20 (17"x7") cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in line. 2. Run the program and develop the film. 3. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. For this verification the dimension of the separation line, determined by the shutters is not important, but the constancy of this dimension. 4. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 (14"x14") cassette divided into 3. If the separation lines are different, it means that the positioning of the cassette is wrong in all its exposures. To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the PDI function in the cell of group 300. The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects, so an intervention should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is well understood. The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the position error is determined by the difference that the error assumes in function of the length of the run. Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies all the runs of all the subdivisions of the same quantity. As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data set in the cells of group 400.
APOLLO
19-2
(Rev. 3)
19.1.2
Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette

By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout of a film 18x24 (8"x10") or 30x24 (12"x10"), a continuous line of separation between the upper and lower radiograms some 2 mm (0.08") thick must be obtained. If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the cassette is wrong. Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical movement with respect to the centre or by too great or too small a movement for both sides, change the value set in cells 459 and 460.
19.1.3
Checking the positioning of the shutters

WARNING: During these tests do not carry out limitations of the collimator width by means of the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator. Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various subdivisions. All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must be the same width. If this not the case, change the data contained in the cells of group 400, in such a way as to obtain what is required. It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has the effect of increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the value of the correction. As an example lets consider that a two line subdivision with width cassette 30 cm (12") results from a minimum separation line (0.5 mm). Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the value in cell 549 (the absolute value of which is not important as it depends on the characteristics of the system).
(Rev. 3)
19-3
APOLLO
19.2
19.2.1
Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field

Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm
NOTE: Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure the column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these checks can be carried out mechanically through the use of a level. 1. Bring the SID at 100 cm (39.4"). 2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a distance of a few cm over the tabletop surface. If the dedicated tool is not available, a replacement tool can be made using two elements of different diameters (see Figure 19-1). 3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool (a way that both the circles of the tool are completely represented in the image). 4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings. 5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise continue.
Tube focus Collimator centre
Move the collimator in this direction
min 200 mm
Correct centering
Figure 19-1
APOLLO
19-4
(Rev. 3)
6. Move the collimator with respect to the X-ray tube using the adjustment possible in the coupling cone: the collimator must move in the same direction as the circle furthest from the tabletop should be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the tabletop. 7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of the X-ray field (in such a way that both circles of the tool are completely represented in the image). Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are centred. 8. Move the SID to 150 cm (59.0") and check that the centering is maintained; if this not the case, check the perpendicularity and repeat the procedure from point 4. 9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both the SIDs, the verticality of the alignment between the focus of the X-ray tube and the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.
(Rev. 3)
19-5
APOLLO
19.3
Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam

NOTE: This procedure can be applied to systems that fit the Villa model collimator. For systems fitting the Ralco mode collimator, refer to the specific manual. NOTE: The light field of the collimator is adjusted in the factory, both for lamp position and for position of the image surface, so, once the centering of the X-ray beam has been carried out, the alignment of the X-ray beam light beam should be guaranteed. 1. To check the alignment of the X-ray beam light beam, turn on the light field and position 4 wads of absorbent material at the 4 edges of the light field. 2. Expose a film and check the position of the wads with respect to the X-ray field produced on the film; the maximum misalignment must be equal to 3% of the SID in each direction and the sum in the two orthogonal directions must not be over 4%. 3. If the dimensions do not coincide (indicator of the fact that the distance of the focus of the X-ray tube from the image surface is different from that of the lamp collimator from the same plan) the collimator lamp can be adjusted, remembering that when the lamp focus is brought towards the mirror, the light main beam gets narrower while it grows bigger when it is moved away.
Tube focus Tube focus Tube focus
G G
Light
Light
Light
Proper alignment
Lamp movement
Mirror movement
Figure 19-2 4. When the optimal alignment between light field and X-ray field is achieved the next step can be taken to align the X-ray field and image receiver (I.I. and Spot Film Device group). These adjustments are easily obtained by moving the tube-collimator integral group on the support using the adjustment margin allowed. Furthermore, the I.I. allows a minimum of adjustment in its fixing
APOLLO
19-6
(Rev. 3)
while, in cases where the Spot Film Device needs adjusting (the adjustment of which is governed by software and set in the factory), it is necessary to work referring to the procedures for the adjustment and setting of the data in the relative memory cells in the relative chapter of this manual. The intervention on the I.I. and Spot Film Device group is only required when in fact it has not been possible to mechanically centre these two parts very well, but this happens rarely as this adjustment is carried out in the factory.
(Rev. 3)
19-7
APOLLO
19.4
Collimator adjustment
The collimator is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made. Nevertheless, once installation is complete it will be necessary to check the size of the collimated formats. For the fluoro formats check that the axles are tangent to the I.I. diameter. This check can be carried out by operating the collimator joystick and checking that the shutters are immediately visible. This must happen at all the possible zoom levels and the adjustment is made through the setting of cells 214, 215, 216 and 217.
NOTE: When width reduction is made by joystick, both collimator and shutters are responsible of the reduction. Can happens that collimator and SFD are not perfectly aligned, so in this case the image on monitor has a side well limited and the other with a shadow. This because one side is limited by collimator and the other by shutters. To avoid this condition is possible to modify the shutters position in comparison with collimator but for joystick limitation only, by using the value inserted into cell 241. For models equipped with the Spot Film Device, use the various formats and check that the collimator covers the selected surface. Also check that the collimated format does not exceed 3% of the SID, the format of the film or its subdivision. To carry out this check, insert a cassette in the Spot Film Device and position a cassette measuring 35x35 (14"x14") on the tabletop. Take an exposure and develop the 35x35 (14"x14") film. By calculating the distance between the film in the Spot Film Device and the one on the surface check that the collimated format on the 35x35 (14"x14") film corresponds to the size of the film in the Spot Film Device after making the appropriate proportion. The correction of the formats can be carried out in 2 ways: by varying the data set in cell 218 that modifies all the format collimation positionings except for the minimum position (collimator closed) by modifying the adjustment of the potmeter minimum following the description in the dedicated paragraph.
APOLLO
19-8
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20
DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Any failure that might occur during the use of the Apollo table is, in the majority of cases, indicated by a diagnosis message that is shown on the display. In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the electronic logic of the processor. This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the faults deriving from displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the second describes faults of different types.
(Rev. 3)
20-1
APOLLO
APOLLO
20-2
(Rev. 3)
20.1
Error 59
Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses

Diagnosis Rays from generator without fluoro or exposure request Cause of the alarm It was detected the presence of X-rays coming from the generator (access X0-13 active) without fluoro / exposure request or X-ray ON is still present after 700ms from fluoro / exposure request released In Spot Film Device mode, one of the collimator axles or shutters did not reach the position set point within 5 secs. Corrective measures The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. If the level is low (0 V) even in conditions of non-emission, remove the wire coming from the generator and connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
60
Timeout collimator or shutters positioning in standard program
When the preparation is activated or when cassette ejection is required, the collimator and the shutters must be positioned over the cassette size or subdivision. Insert a cassette 35x43 (14"x17"), select the panoramic size and press preparation. For collimator leds 24 and 27 of the output PCB must come on indicating the movement in progress. 3 cases might occur: A. one or both of the leds do not come on B. one or both the leds stay on C. after some time on, leds 24 and 25 or 27 and 28 flash For shutters check that at prep command the movement starts to open. Solutions: For collimator A. the width or height motor control circuit is faulty (output PCB) B. the position feedback circuit or the relative potmeter are faulty C. the movement is unstable therefore there are mechanical backlashes on the movement between motor and potmeter or the potmeter is damaged electrically. A temporary solution to this defect might be the increase of the dead band (cells 229, 230, 231), but this entails an increase in the tolerance of the collimated size). Shutters are controlled by PDI system, so if the set point is not reached the reason could be a fault in the power driver circuit located in the SFD power pcb (A4).
(Rev. 4)
20-3
APOLLO
Error 61
Diagnosis Collimator or shutters positioning timeout in rapid sequence mode
Cause of the alarm In rapid sequence mode, one of the collimator axles or shutters did not reach the position set point within 5 secs. The generator did not activate the ready signal within 3 secs. from the request of X-ray II step.
Corrective measures The description of alarm 60 applies.
62
Ready from generator not present
Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to the ground on this terminal. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
63
Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was operator interrupted by releasing the X-ray control. X-ray on not present from generator The generator did not activate the "X-ray" signal within 3 secs. from the fluoro request or within 0,360 secs. in exposure.
64
65
Generator did not stop exposure
The generator X-ray time A radiography carried out on the Spot Film Device can last for a maximum of 6.5 secs. lasted longer than 6.5 secs. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after 6.5 sec even if the X-ray request remains active. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-13 during the emission. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
APOLLO
20-4
(Rev. 3)
Error 66
Diagnosis Exposure command released before end of Xray time Preparation command released before end of Xray time Generator stopped X-ray during Tomo angle
Cause of the alarm Exposure request released before X-ray time (input X0-13) finished. Preparation request released before X-ray time (input X0-13) finished. The generator interrupted the X-ray emission before the tomography angle was completed.
Corrective measures The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request circuit. Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit depending on connector X41. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there can be no hardware defects at this level. The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation circuit. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level. A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the Tomo angle. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must stay low (0 V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. Make a jumper between X0-13 and the ground for the tomography time. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with an oscilloscope. The level must go high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. Check that the generator does not show a tail of this signal for more than 700 msecs. After the X-ray request of the table is off. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. The table logic activates the return of the compressor to the park when access to tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. If the compressor does not reach the parking position (switch S26, input X15-2 input PCB) the fault might be on the compressor motor control circuit (outlets X26 pin 9 and 10 output PCB) or on the A15 power PCB. A check must also be made to see that the X15-2 input depending on the park switch is at a high level when the compressor has activated the switch.
67
68
69
Generator did not stop exposure at the end of Tomo angle
The generator continued the X-ray emission for more than 0.2 secs. after the X-ray control was deactivated. The compressor did not reach the parking position within 30 secs. from the activation of the control for the access in tomo or angio modality access.
70
Compressor did not reach park position in tomo and angio modality
(Rev. 3)
20-5
APOLLO
Error 77
Diagnosis Preparation request interrupted by digital DSI
Cause of the alarm In angiographic mode the generator ready signal is absent.
Corrective measures Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and Xray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
78
Program aborted
In angio modality, the Xray sequence was interrupted before the set number of steps was completed.
80
General emergency
The power relay (input The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input X15-10 X15-10) was deactivated by is not at low level. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact of the external causes. power relay K1L. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the break in the series circuit of the movement emergency switch (X0 pin 5 and 6). The anti-pinching control circuit is interrupted. The Spot Film Device was disabled, therefore the adjustment of the components inside the Spot Film Device is not possible. The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). If the control is active, the input X14-5 (input PCB) must be active (0 V). Check the membrane circuit series and the Spot Film Device PCB A10. This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the request of a Spot Film Device function if cell 261 is set at 1.
82
Anti-crusching circuit damaged SFD is disabled
83
84 88
I.I. lift not present Wrong SID
The I.I. lift is not present in In potmeter adjustment mode, with cell 133 active an attempt is made to move the I.I. the system. lift, but the setting of the presence of this function (cell 255 is 1). The SID has not been set properly. In potmeter adjustment mode, with one of the collimator setting axles cells active (ad 117 to 122) an attempt is made to store the value to memory but the SID (shown on the display) does not correspond to 980 mm.
APOLLO
20-6
(Rev. 3)
Error 89
Diagnosis The minimum has not been adjusted. EEPROM data damaged
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
The minimum position was In potmeter adjustment mode, an attempt is made to store the maximum value of one not stored. of the collimator potmeters (width, height or iris), without adjusting the minimum first. The RAM has detected a non-intentional change of the data in the EEprom. During the movement, the angulation has accumulated a position error above the one set in the cell 311. During the movement, the scan has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 329. Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the RAM with the previous data through the checksum. If they do not correspond, it means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. You are recommended to change the Eeprom that could be defective. The movement of the angulation is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 311. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The movement of the scan is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The movement of the main beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
90
91
Angulation movement over max error
92
Scan movement over max error
93
Main beam movement over max error
During the movement, the main beam has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 346.
(Rev. 3)
20-7
APOLLO
Error 94
Diagnosis Middle beam movement over max error
Cause of the alarm During the movement, the middle beam has accumulated an error position over the one set in cell 346. During the movement, the shutters have accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 363.
Corrective measures The movement of the middle beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The movement of the shutters is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 363. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The right cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The left cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
95
Shutters movement over max error
96
Right cassette belt movement over max error
During the movement, the right belt has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 375.
97
Left cassette belt movement over max error
During the movement, the left belt has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 375.
APOLLO
20-8
(Rev. 3)
Error 98
Diagnosis Cross subdivision movement over max error
Cause of the alarm During the movement, the cross subdivision has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 399.
Corrective measures The sideway cassette movement by cross subdivision is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 399. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The input X18-1 (input PCB) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper working conditions. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters, the series circuit dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated. The cause of the fault must be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB.
99
Inverter fault
One or both inverters are in a warning status, therefore access X18-1 is deactivated.
101
Angulation potmeter under The value detected for the min angulation potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
102
Angulation potmeter over max
The value detected for the angulation potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
(Rev. 3)
20-9
APOLLO
Error 103
Diagnosis Scan potmeter under min
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the scan potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.
104
Scan potmeter over max
The value detected for the scan potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
105
Main beam potmeter under The value detected for the min main beam potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
106
Main beam potmeter over max
The value detected for the potmeter of the main beam is above that stored in Eeprom.
APOLLO
20-10
(Rev. 3)
Error 107
Diagnosis Middle beam potmeter under min
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the middle beam potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the middle beam potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the middle beam is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit because of the break in the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB.
108
Middle beam potmeter over The value detected for the max potmeter of the main beam is above that stored in Eeprom.
111
Transversal tabletop potmeter under min
The value detected for the tabletop potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
112
Transversal tabletop potmeter over max
The value detected for the tabletop potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
(Rev. 3)
20-11
APOLLO
Error 113
Diagnosis SID potmeter under min
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the SID potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.
114
SID potmeter over max
The value detected for the SID potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
117
Width collimator potmeter under min
The value detected for the width collimator potmeter is less than the one stored in EEprom.
118
Width collimator potmeter over max
The value detected for the width collimator potmeter is above that stored in EEprom.
APOLLO
20-12
(Rev. 3)
Error 119
Diagnosis Height collimator potmeter under min
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the potmeter of the height collimator is less than the one stored in EEprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the height collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB.
120
Height collimator potmeter over max
The value detected for the potmeter of the collimator height is above that stored in EEprom.
121
Iris collimator potmeter under min
The value detected for the potmeter of the iris collimator is less than that stored in EEprom.
(Rev. 3)
20-13
APOLLO
Error 122
Diagnosis Iris collimator potmeter over max
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the potmeter of the iris collimator is above that stored in EEprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potmeter. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB.
123
Compression force potmeter under min
The value detected for the compressor potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
124
Compression force potmeter over max
The value detected for the compressor potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
125
Grid potmeter under min
The value detected for the grid potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
APOLLO
20-14
(Rev. 3)
Error 126
Diagnosis Grid potmeter over max
Cause of the alarm The value detected for the grid potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB.
127
Gripping potmeter under min
The value detected for the gripping potmeter is below that stored in EEprom.
128
Gripping potmeter over max
The value detected for the potmeter of the gripping is above that stored in EEprom.
129
Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the under min cross subdivision potmeter is below that stored in EEprom.
(Rev. 3)
20-15
APOLLO
Error 130
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision movement is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutters potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutter potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the over max cross subdivision potmeter is above that stored in EEprom.
131
Shutters potmeter under min
The value detected for the shutters potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom.
132
Shutters potmeter over max
The value detected for the shutters potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom.
133
The angulation potmeter max is lower than min
An angulation potmeter max under the min was stored.
APOLLO
20-16
(Rev. 3)
Error 134
Diagnosis The scan potmeter max is lower than min
Cause of the alarm A scan potmeter max under the min was stored.
Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
135
The main beam potmeter max is lower than min
A main beam potmeter max under the min was stored. A middle beam potmeter max under the min was stored.
136
The middle beam potmeter max is lower than min
138
The transversal tabletop A tabletop potmeter max potmeter max is lower than under the min was stored. min The SID potmeter max is lower than min A SID potmeter max under the min was stored.
139
141
The max of the width collimator potmeter is less than the min
A width collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored.
(Rev. 3)
20-17
APOLLO
Error 142
Diagnosis The max of the iris collimator potmeter is lower than the min The max of the iris collimator potmeter is lower than the min The max of the compression force potmeter is lower than the min The grid potmeter max is lower than min
Cause of the alarm A height collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored. An iris collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored. A compressor potmeter max under the min was stored.
Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
143
144
145
A grid potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
146
The gripping potmeter max A gripping potmeter max is lower than min value under the min was stored. The cross subdivision A cross subdivision potmeter max is lower than potmeter max under the min min was stored.
147
APOLLO
20-18
(Rev. 3)
Error 148
Diagnosis The shutter potmeter max is lower than min
Cause of the alarm A shutter potmeter max under the min was stored.
Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1 CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the line: supervisor TX main RX. The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1 CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the line: supervisor RX main TX. The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on. Furthermore there are jumpers where optional components could be connected. Measure the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off: control desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick) pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands) optional command: X42- with X42-5 (closure jumper) table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys) general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).
156
Serial line: timeout from Supervis. to Main P
The data does not arrive on the serial line from the supervisor to the main P for longer than 0.3 secs.
157
Serial line: timeout from Main P to supervisor
The data does not arrive on the serial line from the main P to the supervisor for longer than 0.3 secs.
158
Single Fault open at switch on.
The Single Fault circuit is not closed, therefore access X13-24 is not at 0 V when the table is powered on.
(Rev. 3)
20-19
APOLLO
Error 159
Diagnosis Inputs close at switch on
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
A joystick or double control When the table is powered up, a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs button are active when the relative to the commands present on the control desk and the table-mounted table is powered up. command. If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active, then an alarm is present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during the powering up procedure or by a faulty command. The state of the table-mounted control keys (PCB A8), of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad), the control desk joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c.s.) and the soft-touch keys of the control desk on the connector X44. The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU PCB) the activation signal, in addition to that of the SF is open. Nevertheless, the serial confirmation of the movement, sent by the main processor is not present. The cause of the fault might be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the parallel line dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the second hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open. The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement activation on the serial line. On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU PCB) there is not however an activation signal. The cause of the fault might be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the parallel line dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the first hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.
160
Single fault open SID up=1 The SID lift control is / serial bit 0=0 probably active when the SF is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. Single fault open SID up=0 The supervisor detects the / serial bit 0=1 open SF and the serial confirmation that the SID lift control is active, but the output port is not active. Single fault open SID down =1 / serial bit 1=0
161
162
The SID control down is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB). is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation.
APOLLO
20-20
(Rev. 3)
Error 163
Diagnosis Single fault open SID down =0 / serial bit 1=1
Cause of the alarm The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the SID down control is active, but the output port is not active.
Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
164
Single fault open tabletop in=1 / serial bit 2=0
The tabletop in control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB). port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the tabletop in control is active, but the output port is not active. What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).
165
Single fault open tabletop in=0 / serial bit 2=1
166
Single fault open tabletop out=1 / serial bit 3=0
The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the probably active as the SF reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB). is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation.
(Rev. 3)
20-21
APOLLO
Error 167
Diagnosis Single fault open tabletop out=0 / serial bit 3=1
Cause of the alarm The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the tabletop out control is active, but the output port is not active.
Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).
168
Single fault open compressor up=1 / serial bit 4=0
The compressor lift control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the SF is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB). port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the compressor lift control is active, but the output port is not active. What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
169
Single fault open compressor up=0 / serial bit 4=1
170
Single fault open compressor down =1 / serial bit 5=0
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. The compressor down The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and control is probably active the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB). when the SF is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation.
APOLLO
20-22
(Rev. 3)
Error 171
Diagnosis Single fault open compressor down =0 / serial bit 5=1
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures
The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and open SF and the serial the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB). confirmation that the compressor down control is active, but the output port is not active. What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
172
Single fault open A5 The A5 inverter enabling inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active 6=0 when the SF is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial 6=1 confirmation that the A5 inverter enabling control is active, but the output port is not active. Single fault open A6 The A6 inverter enabling inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active 7=0 when the SF is open and the output port is active, but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation.
173
What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
174
What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards) and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
(Rev. 3)
20-23
APOLLO
Error 175
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards) and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial 7=1 confirmation that the A6 inverter enabling control is active, but the output port is not active. Single fault close / SID up=1 The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the SID lift control output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the SID down control output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the tabletop control output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the tabletop out control output is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the compressor lift control output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the compressor down control output port is active.
180
There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard ) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V11 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
181
Single fault closed / SID down=1
182
Single fault close / tabletop in=1
183
Single fault close / tabletop out=1
184
Single fault close / compressor up=1
185
Single fault closed / compressor down=1
APOLLO
20-24
(Rev. 3)
Error 186
Diagnosis Single fault close / A5 inverter enable =1
Cause of the alarm The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the A5 inverter enabling command output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the A6 inverter enabling command output port is active. The angulation control is active but potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
Corrective measures There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5 inverter (main beam angulation). The movement activation circuit dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the circuits the fault is on. There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A6 inverter (middle beam scan). The movement activation circuit dependent on a diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 671 and 672 insufficient.
187
Single fault close / A6 inverter enable=1
191
The angulation potmeter does not move with active control
(Rev. 3)
20-25
APOLLO
Error 192
Diagnosis The scan potmeter does not move with active control
Cause of the alarm The scan movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
Corrective measures The main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 673 and 674. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 673 and 674 insufficient. The main processor activates the main beam movement command and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient.
193
The main beam potmeter does not move with active control
The main beam movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
APOLLO
20-26
(Rev. 3)
Error 194
Diagnosis The middle beam potmeter does not move with active control.
Cause of the alarm The middle beam movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
Corrective measures The main processor activates the middle beam movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. The alarm generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is applied as per paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first stages of motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient. The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 679 and 680. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 679 and 680 insufficient.
195
The shutter potmeter does not move with active control.
The shutters movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
(Rev. 3)
20-27
APOLLO
Error 196
Diagnosis Right belt cassette encoder does not move with active control
Cause of the alarm The R cassette movement belt is active but the motion is not detected through the encoder feedback.
Corrective measures The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional to the applied speeds. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement encoder slip values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient. The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional to the applied speed. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement encoder slip values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.
197
Left belt cassette encoder does not move with active control
The L cassette movement belt is active but the motion is not detected through the encoder feedback.
APOLLO
20-28
(Rev. 3)
Error 198
Diagnosis The cross subdivision potmeter does not move with active control.
Cause of the alarm The cross subdivision movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.
Corrective measures The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 685 and 686. The cause of the alarm might be: mechanical hardening of the movement potmeter slip values of the cells 685 and 686 insufficient. The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 452. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
201
Angulation potmeter in movement without request
There is no angulation movement control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
(Rev. 3)
20-29
APOLLO
Error 202
Diagnosis Scan potmeter in movement without request
Cause of the alarm There has been no scan movement output but motion has been detected by the potmeter feedback.
Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 453. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter circuit. If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor did not activate the main beam movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 454. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the potmeter circuit. If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor did not activate the middle beam movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 455. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
203
Main beam potmeter in movement without request
There has been no main beam movement output but motion is detected by the potmeter feedback.
204
Middle beam potmeter in movement without request
There is no middle beam movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
APOLLO
20-30
(Rev. 3)
Error 206
Diagnosis Transversal tabletop potmeter in movement without request
Cause of the alarm There is no tabletop movement output but motion is detected by the potmeter feedback.
Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 456. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 457. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The compressor is in park but, through the potmeter feedback, it is seen that there has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). The cause might have been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in the electric potmeter circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
207
SID potmeter in movement without request
There is no SID movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
212
Compression force potmeter in movement without request
There is no compression control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
(Rev. 3)
20-31
APOLLO
Error 213
Diagnosis Grid potmeter in movement without request
Cause of the alarm There is no grid movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor has not activated the gripping movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the potmeter circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
214
Gripping potmeter in movement without request
There is no gripping movement control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
215
Cross subdivision potmeter There is no cross in movement without subdivision movement request control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
APOLLO
20-32
(Rev. 3)
Error 216
Diagnosis Shutter potmeter in movement without request
Cause of the alarm There is no shutter movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.
Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the shutter movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because: motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) excessive noise on the potmeter signal break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The movement of the tabletop is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 235. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is inserted in cell 447. The alarm can be caused by: a mechanical slipping of the potmeter a mechanical hardening of the movement a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage. The movement of the SID is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 236. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is inserted in cell 448. The alarm can be caused by: a mechanical slipping of the potmeter a mechanical hardening of the movement a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage. The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.
218
Transversal tabletop movement over max error
The transversal tabletop movement exceeded the error value set in cell 447.
220
SID movement over max error
The SID movement exceeded the error value set in cell 448.
226
Compressor down output active without feedback input
No compressor movement feedback present when down control is active.
(Rev. 3)
20-33
APOLLO
Error 227
Diagnosis
Cause of the alarm
Corrective measures The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1 input PCB is active at 0 V. The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there. This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451, while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure. Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit (input X1324 input PCB). Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit: command desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick) pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands) optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper) table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys) general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper). This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451, while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure. The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U1 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M5 motor, D1 driver, U1 optoisolator).
Compressor outputs not The compressor movement active with feedback active. feedback is active without movement commands. Compressor up output active without feedback input Single Fault open without active inputs No compressor movement feedback present when lift control is active. SF circuit is open but no movement control is recognised.
228
231
232
Single Fault close with active inputs
One or more movement controls present but SF circuit is not active (closed). Right cass. belt motor movement exceeded maximum current threshold.
240
Right cass. belt movement overcurrent
APOLLO
20-34
(Rev. 3)
Error 241
Diagnosis Left cass. belt movement overcurrent
Cause of the alarm Left cass. belt motor movement exceeded maximum current threshold. Shutters movement motor exceeded maximum current threshold.
Corrective measures The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U2 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M6 motor, D2 driver, U2 optoisolator). The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers, U4 optoisolator). The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U3 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M10 motor, D3 and D4 drivers, U3 optoisolator). When the cassette transport command is activated, the processor wants to recognise the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 input PCB) active within 1 sec. The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by the cassette moving too slowly. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette. The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs.. If the set point is not reached the cause might be: an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same. dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point break in the movement circuit (engine M7, fuse F23, driver D7).
242
Shutters overcurrent
243
Cross subdivision overcurrent
Cross subdivision movement motor exceeded maximum current threshold. The cassette did not reach the format recognition photocell within 1 sec.
300
Cassette loading error
301
Grid movement timeout
The grid did not reach the destination (parking or position 0) within 8 secs.
(Rev. 3)
20-35
APOLLO
Error 302
Diagnosis Gripping movement timeout
Cause of the alarm The gripping did not reach destination (cassette opening or closing) within 5 secs.
Corrective measures The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 5 secs. If the set point is not reached the cause might be: electrical potmeter fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the opening) gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 input PCB) (only for the closure) dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only for the opening) break in the movement circuit (engine M9, fuse F22, driver D8).
303
Cassette size photosensor not released
Cassette size photosensor The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 input PCB) must be deactivated is obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. The alarm might be 5 secs. caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of the cassette. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette. The SW controlled the gripping open / close control drivers simultaneously. The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation PCB) to pins 5 and 7 have been sent simultaneously. This causes a short circuit that damages the components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 output PCB should be checked.
304
Simultaneous drivers enable
305
I.I. lift movement timeout
The I.I. lift did not reach When the I.I. lift up movement is activated the input X15-4 (switch S28) must be destination (up / down end deactivated within 3 secs. When I.I. lift down movement is activated the input X15-5 run) within 3 secs (switch S29) must be deactivated within 3 secs. The non arrival of the movement at destination might be caused by a mechanical movement failure or an electronic fault of one of the circuit components (switch S28 or 29, motor M12, remote switch K4M and K5M, relay K10 and K11 output PCB).
APOLLO
20-36
(Rev. 3)
Error 306
Diagnosis Timeout shutters or cross subdivision movement for I.I. lift call
Cause of the alarm Cross subdivision or shutter movements did not reach position to allow I.I. lift due to a control error.
Corrective measures When the I.I. lift is called, the shutters must reach the corresponding position to the min potmeter adjustment and the subdivision movement in a cross must reach the centre. Failure to reach these set points within 5 secs. activates the alarm. This might be caused by a fault on one of the control circuits of these movements. See the description for alarm 302 for the gripping circuits. For the shutters the data of the cells 300 relative at that moment are valid. Data in Eeprom are compared with that in the Ram when the equipment is powered up. If the check shows that there is no correspondence between the data and the checksum the alarm is generated. The Eeprom or the Ram must be replaced. In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. Replace the Eeprom; it is probably defective. The comparison of the data was wrong during Eeprom copying (cell 702). Replace the Eeprom; it is probably defective. It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701). Repeat the operation or replace the Ram.
500
RAM-EEPROM: data missing RAM-EEPROM: writing timeout RAM-EEPROM: failed verification RAM-EEPROM: wrong Eeprom reading.
A functioning failure detected on Eeprom. It was not possible to transfer data to Eeprom. Data in Eeprom are different from those in RAM. Data in Eeprom cannot be read.
501 502
503 907
Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. The cause might be due to an operator switch on button are active when the error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key. table is powered up. Check that the control desk keys, keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal have the NO contact open in the rest position.
(Rev. 3)
20-37
APOLLO
Error 961
Diagnosis FLASH-EPROM erasing failed FLASH-EPROM writing failed Data lost in RAM. Check battery
Cause of the alarm The Flash-Eprom was not erased to reset the warnings or cycles history. The Flash-Eprom did not allow to write data relative to history. Data no longer in RAM.
Corrective measures With page 719 active (deletion of alarm history) or a page between 853 and 867 (cycle deletion) the flash eprom is not reset. Repeat the operation or replace the flash eprom. The alarm history or the updating of the table cycles is not written on the flash eprom. Replace the probably defective flash eprom. On powering up the Ram is seen to have no data. This might be caused by a defect in the Ram or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Check the ends of the battery on the CPU PCB to see that there is a voltage of 3.6 V. Change the battery if the voltage is not high enough or change the Ram if the defect persists.
962
999
APOLLO
20-38
(Rev. 3)
20.2
20.2.1
Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor

Table
Reason The I.I. does not escape the ascent band and enters the collision zone. Corrective measures The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without stopping if it the I.I. gets too close to the floor. To ensure this condition a ascent band is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.I.-floor height. When the I.I. enters the ascent band, the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anti-collision movement. If the band is too small, the I.I. might not manage to escape and enter the safety zone. The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased. If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without jerks and vibrations. Remember that if the reduction is too great the gains make the positioning inaccurate.
Fault or malfunction During the tilting, the message "Limit reached" is often displayed".
The movements controlled with the table PDI (tilting, lift, scan, angulation) are not smooth.
Check parameters not regulated properly.
At switch ON the message "LIMIT BARRIER" is displayed The compressor is not brought into the field.
Input X0-17 is not connected to If no safety barrier devices are installed in the room, check that input X0-17 is 0V. connected to 0 V. If safety barrier devices are installed, check that the devices are functional and that are not activated by elements of the table or any other object Wrong adjustment of the compression force minimum photometer. After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit, access the potmeter adjustment routine and cell 123, check that the value of the potmeter with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. If this not the case, an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the compressor is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase the value of the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and then to activate the descent movement. If the movement is activated, the minimum value of the potmeter must then be adjusted.
(Rev. 3)
20-39
APOLLO
Fault or malfunction The horizontal position of the table is not correct. The vertical or Trendelembourg position of the table is not correct. The equipment does not come on. The tomo layer is not correct.
Reason The main and middle beam potmeters have not been adjusted properly. The main and middle beam potmeters have not been adjusted properly. Lack of power supply to the logical circuits. The geometry of some of the table's mechanical components is different.
Corrective measures The horizontal position of the table is obtained thanks to the combination of the main and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4. The extreme positions of the table are obtained thanks to the combination of the main and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4. Check the data in cells 409 and 410 that determine the stop position. Check the presence of the single-phase voltage to the T2 transformer primary. Check that the thermomagnetic cut out Q1 is closed. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken. As the tomography of the Apollo table is completely electronic, the layer position is calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's mechanical dimensions. A defect like this can be corrected by modifying the data contained in cell 438. A sophisticated algorithm manages the main and middle beam movement used for the tilting and lift functions. An anti-collision switch prevents a collision being generated between main and middle beam. If this switch cuts in during movements, the cause might be: main and middle beam potmeter adjustment not correct. A new adjustment must be done as described in paragraph 10.1.4 adjustment of particularly sparse PDI gains. The setting must be changed as described in paragraph 11.2.1.
The main and middle beam The correspondence of the collision switch often cuts in. main beam's position with that of the middle beam is wrong.
APOLLO
20-40
(Rev. 3)
20.2.2
Spot Film Device (not available on All Digital version)

Reason The adjustment of the shutter potmeter is wrong. Corrective measures Recalibrate the shutter potmeter that should have a minimum position corresponding to an opening of 475 mm (18.7"), see paragraph 10.1.14.
Fault or malfunction With I.I. lift high, there is a collision between I.I. and shutters. With I.I. lift high, there is a collision between I.I. and cassette guides.
The potmeter adjustment of the Recalibrate the gripping potmeter adjustment that should have a minimum position gripping opening is wrong. corresponding to an opening of 463 mm (18.2"), see paragraph 10.1.12. If the opening should again prove to be critical, check the set value in cell 228 (dead band gripping opening) that could be excessive. If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without jerks and vibrations. Remember that too great a reduction of the gains makes the positioning imprecise. Check fuse F22 positioned on the PCB A10 on the Spot Film Device. If it is seen to be broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the Spot Film Device violently, on opening. Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4), when the gripping devices do not lock on the cassette.
The movements controlled Check parameters are not correctly regulated. with PDI of the Spot Film Device (longitudinal cassette, transversal cassette and shutters) are not fluid. The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective. movement is not working.
(Rev. 3)
20-41
APOLLO
Fault or malfunction The fluoro exposure time is long.
Reason The positioning of the cassette, of the shutters or of the collimator does not occur in the regular times.
Corrective measures The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette, shutters and collimator reach the correct position. It must therefore be checked which of these three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point. If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements, check to see if there are mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the paragraph 11.2.1. If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles, the cause of this defect might be due to: A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in the paragraph 16.1.2 B- Dead band to small The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233 height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point, by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in the positioning time on the axle. The correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inch) and the data in cell 257 is checked. It should be checked that the cassette size used is in the range allowed (see size table and cm division paragraph 4.2 and inch paragraph 4.3. If the above is correct, check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input X14-2).
The cassette is not recognised.
Wrong use of the cassette or defect in the size reading photosensor.
APOLLO
20-42
(Rev. 3)
Fault or malfunction
Reason
Corrective measures The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the maximum height. Repeat the gripping device opening potmeter adjustment procedure (see paragraph 10.1.12). Check the value of the cell 228. If this value is too big, the gripping device might not be able to open wide enough. Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potmeter paragraph 10.1.13. Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that: if the separation line is too wide, the two numbers of the same quantity must be reduced if the separation line is too narrow, the two numbers of the same quantity must be increased modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the cassette. The shutters and the width collimator are responsible for the subdivision of the radiograms. If the white separation lines do not have a clear border, this means that the limitation is carried out by the collimator. The collimator potmeters adjustment, paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8 height, 10.1.9 iris, must therefore be adjusted. Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the problem. If the separation line has a clear border, the position of the shutters needs to be changed. If the error is constant over all the sizes and subdivisions, the shutter potmeters adjustment must be adjusted as described in paragraph 10.1.14. If the error is only present on a few subdivision programs, the cell whose parameter is to be modified among those present in the table of paragraph 11.3.4.2 must be identified. The central position of the grid is not correct, it must be modified by changing the parameter in cell 220.
The 43 cm (17") high cassette The gripping device opening is is inserted with difficulty in not big enough. the Spot Film Device. The horizontal radiogram subdivision line (cross subdivision program) is not the required size. The transversal movement of the cassette is wrong.
The vertical radiogram subdivision lines are not of the size required.
The positioning of the shutters is incorrect.
The fluoroscopic image shows one side darker than the other.
The grid centering is not correct.
(Rev. 3)
20-43
APOLLO
20.2.3
Collimator
Reason HW adjustment wrong or reduced positioning window. Corrective measures The causes of this defect may be: A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in the paragraph 16.1.2 B- Dead band to small The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233 height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point, by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in the positioning time on the axle. Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8 height, 10.1.9 iris. Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the problem. Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.7 width, 10.1.8 height, 10.1.9 iris. Check the data in the cells 214217 and modify them according to dimensions of the fields of the I.I. installed.
Fault or malfunction One or more collimator axles oscillate when achieving the set point.
The exposed collimation is not correct.
The collimated sizes do not correspond with film size.
The fluoro collimation is not correct.
The collimator sizes do not correspond with I.I. fields.
APOLLO
20-44
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and cleaning
21
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

As all electrical equipments, this unit requires not only a correct usage, but also maintenance and checks on a regular basis. This precaution ensures efficient, long-lasting functioning. Apollo contains mechanical parts such as, bearings, cables and springs that are subject to natural wear and tear. To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator, the equipment must be checked and maintained regularly. The electromechanical and electronic components contained in the units must be adjusted correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give quality radiographic images, to provide top levels of electrical safety and contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits.
NOTE: The Service Engineer has to take special care for all what concerns electrical safety of the device and must make sure of restoring all provisions for electrical safety which may be affected during a service intervention and to solicit the customer to have the electrical safety tests repeated every time the intervention has caused the replacement of important parts or the intervention has significantly affected safety provisions of the device. Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21.1) or by the authorised engineer (paragraph 21.2).
(Rev. 3)
21-1
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and
21.1
Maintenance the operator can carry out

The check carried out directly by the operator are the following:
Frequency Daily Daily Type of check Check the working of the light indicators and LEDs located on the control desk Functioning of joysticks and buttons located on the control desk and on the panel on the side of the table Absence of contrast liquid residuals Check smooth flow and noise of movements Integrity of equipment and labels Method Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection
Daily Daily Monthly
WARNING: The operator is recommended to carry out the controls before each working session. In case of irregularities, high noisiness of motorised components, or failures, the operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.
APOLLO
21-2
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and cleaning
21.2
Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician

It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali services the equipment once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top condition. WARNING: Preventive and/or corrective operations may only be carried out by Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel. At the maintenance stage, the performance of the equipment is checked and if possible adjusted in line with the indications in the previous chapters as summarised in the following table:
Type of check Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath with particular attention to the Spot Film Device covers X-ray beam centering check X-ray field light field correspondence check Cassette size subdivision control Checking of the movements and operability of the control desk and the table-mounted control Checking of the tilting, angulation and tabletop centering Checking of the chain voltage Check of the level of lubricant in the reduction units Check of the motor belts Check of the state of main beam bearings, SID Check of the state of the Spot Film Device gripping movement belts Method Visual inspection Paragraph 19.2 Paragraph 19.2 Paragraph 19.1 Visual inspection Visual inspection Chapter 6 Practical control Practical control Visual inspection Visual inspection
WARNING: Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced.
WARNING: For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the Authorised Technician, you are recommended to adhere to the information reported in chapter 8 of the User's manual.
(Rev. 3)
21-3
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and
APOLLO
21-4
(Rev. 3)
SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings
22
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS

The connections of the cables used on the Apollo tables are made with the use of connectors. The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing:
Pin number
Connection number
(Rev. 3)
22-1
APOLLO
22.1
List of wiring diagrams and drawings

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Interconnection diagram Power supply diagram Functional drawing Cabinet layout A1 CPU PCB layout A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram A2 Input PCB layout A2 Input PCB wiring diagram A3 Output PCB layout
10. A3 Output PCB wiring diagram 11. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout 12. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram 13. A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout 14. A8 Table keyboard PCB layout 15. A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram 16. A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout 17. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram 18. A11 Base unit connector PCB layout 19. A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram
APOLLO
22-2
(Rev. 3)
20. A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout 21. A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram 22. A13 Angulation connector PCB layout 23. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram 24. A14 Control desk - CPU PCB layout 25. A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram 26. A15 Compressor PCB layout 27. A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram 28. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB layout 29. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB wiring diagram 30. A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram
(Rev. 4)
22-3
APOLLO
APOLLO
22-4
(Rev. 3)

D-SUB Connector
ELECTRONIC CABINET
X33
22V 48V TRDX+/TRSA+/-
A2 INPUT X34 X35 X36 X37 X38 X39 X44 24V A2 INPUT X16 A2 INPUT
X50 R5: Shutters pot. X14 X51 R6: Gripping pot. X52 R7: Cross subdivision pot. X19 X68 X68 X44 A8 T.S.O. PCB X53 R8: Grid pot.
X60B1:Cassette Encoder X61B4/5:Cassette size sensor X62B2:Cass.present sensor (Emitter) X63B3:Cass.present sensor (Receiver) X66S33:Cassette gripping switch X67Test Point X101,102,103Emergency switches X64,65Anti-entrapment device (Optional - standard on C-CSA-US vers)
Connector for FLAT CABLE Screws connectors

X12
LIM+/-
X10 X11 X0 X13
20V 18V
IN56IN59
IN0IN31
X3A
A1 CPU PCB
A4 Spot Film Device Motor Driver PCB

(not present on All Digital version) X25
DC+/GR+/GN+/-
A10 Spot Film X55 M6: Cass. Left belt Device PCB
X54 M5: Cass.Right belt X56 M7: Grid motor (not present on X57 M8: Shutters motor All Digital version) X58 M9: Gripping motor X59 M10: Cross subdivision motor
Spot Film Device

X75S32:Anticoll.Main/Middle beam Emergency switch X77S46-47:Table Top Emerg.switches X78S48-49:Main beam Emerg.switches X81S54-55:Middle beam Emerg.switches X83R1:Main beam pot. X84R3:Middle beam pot.
I19I29
A10 SFD
X14
I33I37 ENC_A ENC_B +5V ENC I0I10
IN32IN59 ENC_A ENC_B IA0IA15 +5V ENC Vref Pot
X3B
O60O63 OUT64OUT71 TPU0..TPU3
A2 INPUT A2 INPUT A2 INPUT
X15
X17
X4 X5A
OUT0OUT39
A12 Interconnection PCB
X46

(located on base)
A12
X15
X21
X47 Enable for K2-K3-K4-K5 X49 K1L: table emergency A2 INPUT X20
X88R11:Table Top pot. X92Y1:Main beam brake X93Y3:Middle beam brake
A10 SFD
X16
I39I54
X5B
OUT40OUT71
O8, O9 IK1L, OK1L O2O6 O36O59 KVA
X26 X105 X0 X97 X98
X96M13:Table Top motor.
A12
X17
I12I17
X6
INV.
X18
I30I32
A10 SFD
X1 X19
I12I17
10V 10V
O10O11 O18O21 O32O35 TPU0TPU3 VOUTA..VOUTD ORS KVA
X27
APOLLO Table
X74Emergency switches circuit X76S44-45:SID Emergency switches X79S50-51:Angulation Emerg.switches X80S52-53:Scanning Emerg.switches X82R10:Compressor pot. X85R2:Angulation pot.
LUMN CONM
X28 X48 X29 X45
28Vdc
X104
X2 X20
I12I17
A3 OUTPUT PCB
X24 X107
24Vdc 18V 18V 36V USMC U32U35
A15 Compressor PCB
X99

(located on column)
A11
X45 X45
O0O1
X86R4:Scanning pot. X87R9:SID pot. X89S25:Tube at 0 position X90S26-27:Compres.end-run switches X91S28-29:I.I. lift end-run switches X94Y2:Angulation brake X95Y4:Scanning brake
A12
X21
I12I17
X8
I11 I18b
X23 X32
A2 INPUT
X32 X22
Inverter
X31 X18 A2 INPUT X69
X71 Angulation motor X72 Middle beam motor X73 Scanning motor
PCB
Collimator
X30
X70 Main beam motor
X0
X99M11-14:SID,compressor motors X100S31:L/H speed change switch
CAN BUS S.F. 24V
X41 Foot switch
APOLLO Interconnection diagram
1
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
Control Desk
X42 Hand switch
(Rev. 3)
22-5
APOLLO Power supply diagram

Code 39849002 - Rev. 1
2
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-7
APOLLO Functional drawing

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 1 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-9

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 2 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-11

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 3 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-13

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 4 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-15

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 5 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-17

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 6 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-19

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 7 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-21

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 8 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-23

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 9 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-25

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
Page 10 of 19 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-27

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-29

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-31

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-33

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-35

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-37

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-39

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-41

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-43

Code 39849001 - Rev. 9
3
(Rev. 4)
22-45
APOLLO Cabinet layout

Code 83848060 - Rev. 2 (CE) Code 83848250 - Rev. 0 (C-CSA-US) (Rev. 3)
4
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-47
APOLLO A1 CPU PCB layout

Code 58838150 - Rev. 6
5
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-49
APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 1 of 9 APOLLO
22-51

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 2 of 9 APOLLO
22-53

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 3 of 9 APOLLO
22-55

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 4 of 9 APOLLO
22-57

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 5 of 9 APOLLO
22-59

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 6 of 9 APOLLO
22-61

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 7 of 9 APOLLO
22-63

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 8 of 9 APOLLO
22-65

Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
6
Page 9 of 9 APOLLO
22-67
APOLLO A2 Input PCB layout

Code 58838152 - Rev. 2
7
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-69
APOLLO A2 Input PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)
8
Page 1 of 4 APOLLO
22-71

Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)
8
Page 2 of 4 APOLLO
22-73

Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)
8
Page 3 of 4 APOLLO
22-75

Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)
8
Page 4 of 4 APOLLO
22-77
APOLLO A3 Output PCB layout

Code 58838154 - Rev. 0
9
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-79
APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 1 of 8 APOLLO
22-81

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 2 of 8 APOLLO
22-83

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 3 of 8 APOLLO
22-85

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 4 of 8 APOLLO
22-87

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 5 of 8 APOLLO
22-89

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 6 of 8 APOLLO
22-91

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 7 of 8 APOLLO
22-93

Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)
10
Page 8 of 8 APOLLO
22-95
APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout

Code 58838156 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
11
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-97
APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
12
Page 1 of 3 APOLLO
22-99

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0
12
Page 2 of 3 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-101

Code 39849031 - Rev. 0
12
Page 3 of 3 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-103
APOLLO A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout

Code 58848154 - Rev. 0
13
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-105
APOLLO A8 Table keyboard PCB layout

Code 58843050 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
14
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-107
APOLLO A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849019 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
15
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-109
APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout

Code 58833015 - Rev. 2 (CE) Code 58843054 - Rev.0 (C-CSA-US) (Rev. 3)
16
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-111
APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849014 - Rev. 2 (Rev. 3)
17
Page 1 of 2 APOLLO
22-113
APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849014 - Rev. 2 (Rev. 3)
17
Page 2 of 2 APOLLO
22-115
APOLLO A11 Base unit connector PCB layout

Code 58841050 - Rev. 0
18
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-117
APOLLO A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849010 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
19
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-119
APOLLO A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout

Code 58848150 - Rev. 0
20
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-121
APOLLO A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849012 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
21
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-123
APOLLO A13 Angulation connector PCB layout

Code 58843052 - Rev. 0
22
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 3)
22-125
APOLLO A13 Angulation connector PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849021 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
23
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-127
APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout

Code 58838158 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 4)
24
Page 1 of 2 APOLLO
22-129
APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout

Code 58838158 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 4)
24
Page 2 of 2 APOLLO
22-131
APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 1 of 7 APOLLO
22-133

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 2 of 7 APOLLO
22-135

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 3 of 7 APOLLO
22-137

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 4 of 7 APOLLO
22-139

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 5 of 7 APOLLO
22-141

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 6 of 7 APOLLO
22-143

Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)
25
Page 7 of 7 APOLLO
22-145
APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB layout

Code 58848152 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
26
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-147
APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
27
Page 1 of 3 APOLLO
22-149

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
27
Page 2 of 3 APOLLO
22-151

Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 3)
27
Page 3 of 3 APOLLO
22-153
APOLLO A16 Additional Collimator Filtres PCB layout

Code 58848156 - Rev. 0
28
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-155
APOLLO A16 Additional Collimator Filtres PCB wiring diagram

Code 39849051 - Rev. 0 (Rev. 4)
29
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
22-157
APOLLO A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram
Code 58846140 - Rev. 0
30
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO
(Rev. 4)
22-159
SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts
23
SPARE PARTS
1 Electrical components 2 Electrical cabinet and PCBs inside the table 3 Connections cables 4 Control desk 5 Keyboard (TSO) 6 Foot control 7 Tabletop movement 8 Compressor group 9 Spot Film Device Cassette movement 10 Spot Film Device Shutters / Grid group 11 Spot Film Device Gripping group 12 Spot Film Device Cross division group 13 Tabletop 14 Collimator 15 Covers 16 Curved tabletop accessories 17 Flat tabletop accessories
(Rev. 3)
23-1
APOLLO
1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Ref. M2
Order code 6184420100 6184422100 6283310700 6283310300 6283310600 6283314900 6283317400 6283304400 6283331300 6284250100 6184613100 6284708800 4192005100 4192005200 4233103400 4208404000 4233104900 4291308800 4291309400 4291308400 4291307800 4233104900 4291309000 4208404000 4291309200
Description Angulation motor Angulation motor DX cassette movement motor with Encoder Encoder assy SX cassette movement motor Shutters motor assy Grid motor assy Gripping motor Cross division motor assy I.I. lift motor assy Tabletop movement motor Compressor motor assy Potentiometer 10K 10gg Linear potentiometer 1.7K Ball-microswitch Microswitch Ball-microswitch Crouzet microswitch XGG12-88Z1 UL/CSA microswitch Crouzet microswitch Crouzet microswitch Ball-microswitch Microswitch Microswitch UL/CSA microswitch Crouzet microswitch UL/CSA microswitch
Note CE version C-CSA-US version
M5 -M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M12 M13 M14 R2, R5, R6, R7, R8, R11 R10 S25 S26, S27 S28, S29 S30
CE version C-CSA-US version
S31 S33 S44, S45
CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version
S50
S51
4291308400 4291309100
APOLLO
23-2
(Rev. 3)
S44 S45 S25 S26
(Rev. 3)
S31 M14 R8 M7 M5 M12 S28 S29 R5 M8 R7 M6 R6 M9 S33 M10
R10
S30
S27
M13
S50
S51
R11
23-3
M2
R2
APOLLO
Ref. M1
Order code 4391106900 4391107900
Description Main beam actuator motor Main beam actuator motor Middle beam actuator motor Middle beam actuator motor Scan motor Scan motor SID motor Potentiometer 10K 10gg Crouzet microswitch UL/CSA microswitch Ball-microswitch Ball-microswitch Crouzet microswitch Fuses kit
Note CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version
M3
4391106800 4391107800
M4
4391106700 4391107700
M11 R1, R3, R4, R9 S32
6284413100 4192005100 4265712600 4291309300
S46, S47 S48, S49, S54, S55 S52, S53 --
4233104900 4233103400 4291308400 6684112000
APOLLO
23-4
(Rev. 3)
(Rev. 3)
R9 M11
S53
R4
S52
M4 S54 S55 R1
23-5
M1 S49 S32 M3 S48 R3
S46
S47
APOLLO
2 ELECTRICAL CABINET and PCBs INSIDE THE TABLE

Ref. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5, A6 A7 A12 A15 A16 K1L K2M, K3M, K4M, K5M Order code 5883815000 5883815200 5883815400 5883815600 4492706800 5884815400 5884815000 5884815200 5884815600 4291512300 4291517300 Description CPU board A1 Input board A2 Output board A3 Spot Film Device motor drive board A4 Inverter Mitsubishi Filter board A7 Cabinat connector board A12 Compressor board A15 Additional Collimator Filters board A16 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz (4 NO + 1NO) K1L 3-phases power rele 24V 50/60Hz with filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 2 NC) K2M, K3M, K4M, K5M Power rele 24V 50/60Hz with filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 4 NC) K6M, K7M, K8M, K9M Rele 2 contact 7A 24Vac K10M, K11M Rele socket 3-phases filter 440Vac 10A 1-phase filter 0.5uF 100ohm 160Vac Z34, Z35 3-phases breaker 6.3-10A Q1 Rectifier 25A 200V V1, V2, V3 3-phases screened transformer 6kVA 3-phases screened transformer 6kVA 1-phase transformer 140VA 1-phase transformer 560VA 1-phase transformer 590VA Spot Film Device board A10 Spot Film Device board A10 Base unit connector board A11 Angulation connector board A13 Table Top Control board A17 Note
K6M, K7M, K8M, K9M K10M, K11M -Z1 Z34, Z35 Q1 V1, V2, V3 T1
4291514200
4291505400 4571810600 4192211300 4192507100 4291511700 4165121100 4492821600 4492821700
T2 T3 T4 A10 (*)
4492820900 4492821000 4492811100 5883301500 5884305400 5884105000 5884305200 5884614000
A11 (*) A13 (*) A17 (*)
(*) Inside Apollo table
APOLLO
23-6
(Rev. 4)
(Rev. 3)
23-7
APOLLO
3 CONNECTION CABLES
Ref. X0-X74 X0-X99 X0-X101 X8 X14 X16 X19 X20 X44 X45 X46 X68 X99 X105 10
Order code 6284821000 6284820900 6284820600 6284821400 6284820300 6284820400 6284820200 6284820700 6284820500 6284821300 6284820800 6284820100 6284821100 6284821200 6284821500
Description Emergency switch cable X0-X74 SID motor cable X0-X99 Emergency red button cable X0-X101 Console cable X8 SFD signal cable X14 TSO cable X16 SFD potentiometer cable X19 Table potentiometer cable X20 SFD power cable X44 Collimator cable X45 Board connection cable X46 SFD motor cable X68 Compressor motor cable X99 Board connection cable 105 Ground cable N.10
Note
APOLLO
23-8
(Rev. 3)
4 CONTROL DESK
3
(7x)
Ref. -1 2 3 --
Order code 8384800000 6684802300 6184801500 6684802400 5883815800
Description Control desk assy Policarbonate skin Joystick plate assy Knob for joystick (7x) Control desk CPU board A14
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-9
APOLLO
5 KEYBOARD (TSO)
Ref. -1 2
Order code 6284320600 5484305000 6684320400
Description Table Keyboard A8 assy Keyboard PCB Keyboard skin assy
Note
APOLLO
23-10
(Rev. 3)
6 FOOT CONTROL
Ref. ------
Order code 7184806000 4291419400 4291419500 6284806600 2300439200
Description Foot control assy Fluoro switch (2 microswitches) Exposure switch (4 microswitches) Connection cable Cable protection
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-11
APOLLO
7 TABLE TOP MOVEMENT
6 5
Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Order code 4990806200 5284610400 5284610700 5284612000 6690806300 6184613600
Description Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26 Toothed pulley AT5-Z19 Toothed pulley M1-Z100 Open toothed belt 16 AT5 Belt pulley intermediate assy
Note
APOLLO
23-12
(Rev. 3)
4 1 3
5 6
Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Order code 4990806200 5284612900 5284613000 5284611300 6690806300 6184613600
Description Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340 Toothed pulley AT5-Z34 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26 Toothed pulley AT5-Z19 Open toothed belt 16 AT5 Belt pulley intermediate assy
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-13
APOLLO
8 COMPRESSOR GROUP
Ref. M14 S26, S27 S31 S30 R10 1 2 3
Order code 6284708800 4208404000 4291308400 4291308800 4192005200 2100262400 4890311000 6184704600
Description Compressor motor assy UP/DOWN switch Parking switch Compressor force switch Linear potentiometer 1.7K Compressor spring Cable chain Compressor cup assy
Note
APOLLO
23-14
(Rev. 3)
S31 M14
S26 R10 S27 S30
1 2
(Rev. 3)
23-15
APOLLO
9 SPOT FILM DEVICE CASSETTE MOVEMENT
Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M5 -M6 8 9 10
Order code 6183309500 4990845400 5283308200 4990805700 6183309200 5283307700 6683310000 6683310700 6283310300 6283310600 6283323600 6283323700 5683321900
Description Tensioning pulley for cass. movement Toothed belt T5x14 L=1920mm Sliding bar Closed toothed belt T5x12 L=600mm Rear pulley assy Driving toothed pulley Optical sensors with cable kit DX cassette movement motor with Encoder Encoder SX cassette movement motor Light receiver with cable Light emitter with cable Leaf spring assembly
Note
APOLLO
23-16
(Rev. 3)
M5
M6
(Rev. 3)
10
23-17
APOLLO
10 SPOT FILM DEVICE SHUTTERS / GRID GROUP
Ref. 1 2 3 M7 M8 --
Order code 4990806000 4990805900 4990805800 6283314900 6283317400 6690805500
Description Closed toothed belt T5x8 L=215mm Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=200mm Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=220mm Shutters motor assy Grid motor assy Open toothed belt kit T5x8 (gripping, shutters, grid)
Note
APOLLO
23-18
(Rev. 3)
(Rev. 3)
M7
23-19
APOLLO
M8
11 SPOT FILM DEVICE GRIPPING GROUP
R6 S33 1
M9
Ref. -M9 S33 R6 1
Order code 7183300000 6283304400 4291307800 4192005100 5783301200
Description Gripping assy Gripping motor assy Microswitch Crouzet Potentiometer 10K 10gg Gripping spring
Note
APOLLO
23-20
(Rev. 3)
12 SPOT FILM DEVICE CROSS DIVISION GROUP
R7
M10
Ref. 1 M10 R7
Order code 4990805600 6283331300 4192005100
Description Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=840mm Cross division motor assy Potentiometer 10K 10gg
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-21
APOLLO
13 TABLETOP
Ref. 1 2 3
Order code 7184600600 7184600000 7184600700
Description Curved plastic tabletop Curved carbon fibre tabletop Flat plastic tabletop
Note
APOLLO
23-22
(Rev. 3)
14 COLLIMATOR
Ref. -1 2 3 4 5 --
Order code 8611005100 5811227000 4591606700 4192004000 4391103000 5911310900 8611005000
Description Automatic collimator Push button collimator panel board Halogen lamp 24V 100W Potentiometer 10k 3gg Collimator motor 24V Collimator plexiglas cover Iris collimator
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-23
APOLLO
15 COVERS
Ref. a
Order code 6184507200 6184507300
Description SFD upper cover SFD upper cover SFD front cover SFD left lateral cover SFD right lateral cover SFD lower cover Base front cover Scanning cover Base left/right lateral cover Tabletop support arm front cover Scanning left rear cover Scanning right rear cover Angulation cover X-ray tube left lower cover X-ray tube right lower cover X-ray tube main cover I.I. lift cover
Note CE version C-CSA-US version
b c d e f g1, g2 h i l1 l2 m n1 n2 o p
5484500700 6184508100 6184508000 6184506900 5684504000 5484508200 5484503200 5484501400 5684502700 5684502800 6184505400 5684434700 5684434800 5484434600 6184506400
with I.I. lift only
APOLLO
23-24
(Rev. 3)
g1
g2
n1
n2
l1
l2
(Rev. 3)
23-25
APOLLO
Ref. q r s t u1 u2 v1 v2 w z
Order code 5484500100 5484500300 5484502600 5484502500 5684502700 5684502800 5684504300 5684504200 5684232300 5684108200
Description SID rear cover Column rear cover Rear cables junction upper cover Rear cables junction lower cover Scanning rear left cover Scanning rear right cover Base left rear cover Base right rear cover Cables chains junction bracket Cables output cover
Note
APOLLO
23-26
(Rev. 3)
v2 r s q w t z u2
(Rev. 3)
23-27
APOLLO
u1
v1
16 CURVED TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Order code 7184621100 6184623000 7184622900 7184623200 7184624300 7184626200
Description Headrest Patient support handgrip (1 pc.) Block patient footrest Legrest (2 pcs.) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder
Note
APOLLO
23-28
(Rev. 3)
17 FLAT TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
1 2
4 5
Ref. 1 2 3 -4 5 6
Order code 7173150000 6173120000 7173150000 6673145900 8173142500 7173129000 7173115000
Description Headrest Patient support handgrip (1 pc.) Block patient footrest Unblocked footrest kit (2x) Legrest (2 pcs.) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder
Note
(Rev. 3)
23-29
APOLLO
APOLLO
23-30
(Rev. 3)
Code 6984900703_Rev.4
0051
Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A. Via Delle Azalee, 3 20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy Tel. (+39) 02 48859.1 Fax (+39) 02 4881844

Apol Lo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apol Lo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Revision history

SERVICE MANUAL Revision history

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

ID labels .............................................................................................. 3-1

Description .......................................................................................... 3-4

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23

6.7 6.8 6.9

6.10 Final verifications .............................................................................. 6-49

THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE

Functioning sequences ........................................................................ 7-3

Fault Conditions .................................................................................. 7-6

IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

10.1 Potmeter adjustment ......................................................................... 10-4

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)

11.1 Group 200 Installation data ............................................................ 11-3

11.2 Group 300 PDI controlled motor data............................................ 11-17

SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC FUNCTIONALITY

13.1 Collision ............................................................................................ 13-1

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

14.1 Spot Film Device ................................................................................ 14-1

14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4

14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7 14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8

14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10

14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13

EMERGENCY END RUN HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT

16.1 A3 output PCB................................................................................... 16-1

16.2 Compressor PCB................................................................................ 16-4

19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment ............................................................. 19-1

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS

22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings ................................................ 22-2

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SERVICE MANUAL Introduction

Symbols used in this manual

SERVICE MANUAL Introduction

How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

R.F. source power 10 mW 100 mW 1W 10 W 100 W

Distance (m) 0.3 1 3 8 30

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

8 7 6 5 4 3 Occupation area (see Figure 2-2)

Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

Occupation area 600x2380 mm (23.6"x93.7") H = 2000 mm (78.7")

Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view

Occupation area (see Figure 2-4)

Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

Occupation area 600x600 mm (23.6"x23.6") H = 1700 mm (66.9")

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

Environmental risks and disposal

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects